Home

2013 Dodge Dart Owner`s Manual

1. 549 Witte DUMCHNS sse a ced A obire amp eeu es 45 261 Window POESIE oi osse ad aa ARE BERE DS 374 WIRGOWS c 41 Power 2322 54 49 54 34455 EA d mad IS ES 41 Windshield Defroster anaana anaana 96 364 Windshield Washers 220227 Andsbiele Wipers oo aa V Sure 45 94 DERS EED 220 533 Wipers Miermiteni seppe Noa nacia ir eee BERE H 22 Wipers Ram Sensitive ss 0aei aee PUR a 223 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body Sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure
2. Tm FM 95 5 69 out Phonebook Fdit Number Neset to Default Dad Keith Melissa Emergency 7 terns In fet Er 4 IL B zz Nw o ar liadio layer Controls Climate Lhone e The Options pop up will appear and you can choose between Editing the number or resetting the number to default 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available and supported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service pro vider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone e Redial e Dial by touching in the number e Voice Commands Dial by Saying a Name Call by Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back e Favorite Phonebook Mobile Phonebook Recent Call Log SMS Message Viewer NOTE All of the above operations except Redial can be done with 1 call or less active Dial By Saying A Number e Press the amp button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial 248 555 1212 e The Uconnect Phone will 248 555 1212 dial the number NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Call By Saying A Phoneb
3. 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If an object is detected in the center rear region the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous If an object is detected in the left and or right rear region the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and or right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast to continuous AM 760 WJR R One Half Second Tone UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 AM 760 WJR AM 760 WJR ey N R 032766807 eas 032766806 Slow Tone Slow Tone 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE AM 760 WJR AM E MPH a R 032766804 Fast Tone 760 WJR Ty N Fast Tone R 032766801 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 AM 760 WJR AM 760 WJR p E R 032766802 032766808 Fast Tone Continuous Tone 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE AM 760 WJR Continuous Tone R 032766805 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following ch
4. 248 D Opening Sunroof Express 259 O Sunglass Bin Door 4599 dre Rm s 249 D Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 260 lll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 249 B Closing Sunroof Express O Before You Begin Programming B Closing Sunroof Manual Mode eed DE EE e E Dineh Protect Feature esee ea 260 O Programming A Rolling Code 251 O Venting Sunroof Express 260 de eo ET eus O Sunshade Operation sies gn REY DEE 261 End oak OE Mii c o saans sale EDE ie 261 ES RT dotis eun O Sunroof Maintenance osse cese rms 261 HSecurty eise nn nn eem O Ignition Off Operation 261 es DO ashok dotis aoe W Electrical Power Outlets If Equipped 262 O General Information 258 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M _ apholderS vaa EER ee ee ehe T 200 Mi Cargo Area Peatires lt 2 44445 4k RR RS 271 Hi Froiit Seat Cupholder as se ae RED 504 23 265 O Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped With 60 40 O Rear Seat Cupholders 266 split Folding Rear Seat 271 Ee ER ONE ee 267 D Trunk Mat If Equipped 274 O Glovebox Storage 0 06 267 O Cargo Tie Downs sees ee 274 O Console Features 0 0000 eee 268 Ski Pass Through Ee ee ee 2 5 O Door Storage isses 269 W Rear Window Features nananana aaaea 275 3 Passenger Seat Storage
5. 55 O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 56 D Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR KEGU OL fiancee 9 9 ao AE eae d dar eae 56 NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 O Energy Management Feature O Seat Belt Pretensioner O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women O Seat Belt Extender O Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags o Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls D Event Data Recorder EDR o Child Restraints ll Engine Break In Recommendations ll Safety Tips D Transporting Passengers o Exhaust Gas O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The bun ii ESE Ee OE GR DE EDS RE O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or keyless ignition system The key start ignition system consists of a either a bladed key with an immobilizer chip in it or a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an Ignition Node Module IGNM The keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node KIN Ignition Node Module IGNM If Equipped The Ignition Node Module IGNM operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tion
6. General Information DO Tire Pressure O Tire Inflation Pressures o Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation o Radial Ply Tires O Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped D Compact Spare Tire If Equipped O Full Size Spare If Equipped 3 Limited Use Spare If Equipped O Tire Spinning O Tread Wear Indicators 442 POOP Tie ane spy DELE OR ER AE OS 443 O Replacement Tires 22542444249 HARE ROER 144 W Tire Chains Traction Devices 446 N iS Ties ERR TEST TET TETTE COT TT 447 B Tire Rotation Recommendations li Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS O Base System O Premium System If Equipped 454 O General Information xa se edacsore cee des 457 Bl Fuel Requirements 0 457 EL Milo EE sie oo mure EX oye ers 457 HOL And 24L El2ie 39 914 9 fitri 457 3 8 STARTING AND OPERATING ee O Reformulated Gasoline 450 ME Trailer Towing is eo SR SE BEPERK OAR RR A67 O Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 458 B Common Towing Definitions 467 O E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 459 O Trailer Hitch Classification 469 o MMT In Gasoline sess 460 o Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer o Materials Added To Fuel 0 460 M RE d O Fuel System CaunOns sin eux ue DER 460 EE EE an O Carbon Monoxide Warnings 461 SONI Ped MIC MEN TE ied ue Wie Fuel uius
7. T 5 Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 441 WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The l
8. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and your injuries in a collision much worse You might adjust the front seat suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Pulling
9. bution Ne Enter message from defined list provide by system or say List lo haar all 18 defined 030863305 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 NOTE You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth than these com mands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and for John Smith underlined in the gray shaded boxes e You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls e Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference r
10. Gear Selec 6to5 5to4 4to3 3to2 2tol tion Maxi 80 129 70 113 50 81 30 48 15 24 mum Speed NOTE You MUST press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 WARNING WARNING Continued e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some thing Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFE and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle Continued 388 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others coul
11. ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect Sys tem Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 ParkSense Display AM 760 WJR When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status prn 760 WJR 2 NITE E P R Park Assist System Off O00 Park Assist Ready Park Assist System Off 9 0 0 The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing 032766800 ka i a single arc in one or more regions based on the object s Park Assist Ready distance and location relative to the vehicle
12. Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle 410 STARTING AND OPERATING See Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive
13. 289i Wipe Off Rear Park Assist Sensors 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ASSIST SYSTEM DISABLED message If PARK ASSIST SYSTEM DISABLED appears in the EVIC cycle the AM 760 WJR A3 MPH ignition If the message appears again see an authorized dealer AM 760 WJR re MPH E P R wv Service Park Assist System ooo E PYL R Service Park Assist System gt d Baik aklat val r m The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system will be automati See gt cally disabled when there are faulted conditions outside SES of the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system that inhibit the um feature from functioning properly The Electronic Vehicle Park Assist System Disabled Information Center EVIC will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the PARK NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist system operating properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the EVIC will
14. 6 Climate Control Hard Controls Uconnect System Hard Controls 7 Power Outlet 8 Ignition Switch 040163962 9 Trunk Release 10 Hood Release 11 Dimmer Control 12 Headlight Switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE 040370544 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM ANALOG 8 040369778 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM DIGITAL 040369779 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and c
15. Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the vr button during the playing of the desired name and say Call The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call
16. EVIC displays IGNITION MODE RUN 382 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 30 F or 34 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is required for the 1 4L Turbo and 2 4L engines and recommended for the 2 0L engine Extended Park Starting NOTE Extended Park condition occurs when the ve hicle has not been started or driven for at least 35 days 1 Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle 2 Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it when the engine starts 3 If the engine fails to start within 25 seconds turn the ignition switch to the STOP OFF LOCK position wait 60 seconds to allow the starter to cool then repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded Leave the ignition key in the ON position release the ac
17. If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel Always make sure that floor mats are properly the air directed against the windshield See your autho attached to the floor mat fasteners rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNINCG vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional flo
18. hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 423 WARNING Continued e HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to follow these warnings may cause the vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide with another vehicle object or person and cause serious or fatal injury Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for over steering and under steering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC reduces engine torque and applies brake pressure to select individual wheels to mitigate vehicle under steer and ve
19. 386 BA INN Ubris ducet IT ace H Key Ignition Park Interlock 388 EH Engine Fails To Start uei acetone os ves 382 O Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 388 3 6 STARTING AND OPERATING ee D Six Speed Automatic Transmission 1 4L Turbo Engine Only Ddct O Gear Ranges D Six Speed Automatic Transmission 2 0L And 2 4L Engine Only 6F24 299 mie M cu TTD 400 OS EE SEE ET EE 407 El Detail 2533208 939 9 9 3 0 SORS STE SE RED 407 Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 408 Helen ol MEER en ED NE 408 EA O X Bea oe ad 409 N Driving Through Water 409 ELElowmg Rising Water 29 EERS ER EER ds 410 7 Shallow Standing Water sss etos tmn 410 W Parking Brake 62242544554 5n542 6552005 412 Mi Power Steering leere 414 N Electronic Brake Control System 415 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 415 D Brake Assist System BAS 418 H Traction Control System TCS 418 O Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 419 E Trailer Sway Control ISC sssrescareessa 420 O Hill Start Assist HSA 420 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 423 N Tire Safety Information 427 El lite Mates es medi ve cared bur ER oye oe 427 O Tire Identification Number TIN 430 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 O Tire Terminology And Definitions H Tire Loading And Tire Pressure B Tires
20. Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 21 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 537 560 561 ach MMC m 560 Di posd P Pm 540 MOPedi ace Care RR VERRE ELKE VERIS 546 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 21 Assist Hill Start leen 420 ai hele dIe ie AA PARE FEE EE EKS 131 Auto Down Power Windows 42 Auto Unlock Doors eere 34 Auto Up Power Windows 3509 RTI RE SORS 43 Automatic Dimming Mirror aeuo e hoa 105 a EEEEELLLLLLILSIILIIILLIIIIIIULIIIILIILUILIL LANLB LULCILBLEEUO ODHIALIGGGo 4OGIOUGOoLUULUUL KGCAGAAGOGGGUHGOLIUUqAa L1JLALA INDEX 33 Automatic Door Locks leen 34 Agtomauc Headlights sis see n ER RA HERE d 212 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 372 Automatic Transaxle EE Es Ee 380 Automatic Transmission 386 544 Adding TG srt erireeri te VOER RE RS 545 Fluid and Filter Changes iccyereta4ob 44 545 Fluid Level Check 0005 545 Dd We veep EE toes 39 999 2 9 65 544 eat Ronee Pr 390 400 PCC alan GES dy sop oH Sata amp oc D m des 545 Autostick uu 44 orbs dex be Re ORAS HES EGS ER 407 B Pillar Location tee RI EER EE 432 zn A D m 528 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Belts Seat ico 3o eier ik ROER De 50 95 Body Mechanism Lubrication 592 Drake JASSISLUOVSIORI s re redra e dots emer gs 418 Brake Control System Electronic 415
21. Brake FM soe soma a Ran EE HOE Ries OR ans 562 Blake vele oo is ein a ged d dod DI 542 Anti Lock ABS beak ken der b de mbar ed 415 Master v ndef isi 33999 NRS let ea 542 FOKUS oos eN AK bae oe eyes A12 Wate LIO Fed NEE a aoe SPORE ES DE 289 Brake Pore ase ER OR 5o dbdies riot Rea dee 412 Brake Transmission Interlock 388 lis Pr 542 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 93 Brightness Interior Lights ss 242464 eme dee 4 218 Bulb Replacement 2 dora aseo e ws 056 557 Bulps LIEDE ous yd oe hang 94 0I VPE SE RUE 97 556 Cameri Beg 6644646655 r3 1 9 5 2 3 PETS 245 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 560 Sapaciles PIU 4 062 s5b0G kA HER x ee ase oes 560 584 INDEX M Caps Filler PUCL T 462 Oil ENGINE iis eae SA RAPS hae d 518 519 526 Car Washes rm 547 Carbon Monoxide Warning 94 461 CD Compact Disc Player issie ee ms 350 Cellular PRONE s ss mos EX oe ees US 117 360 Chains TIe aus 403 ike PRG ORG d Y ds 446 Chonging A Flat liie RE NE EES 484 Chart Tre IZ o sasa sien tegane wen TE rdc ai 428 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 294521 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 94 CHECKS Daley ou 3099 4 83 ee ERE DEE ERE 94 Child Restraint uas bue Dan deo rati 83 84 85 88 90 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 87 88 Child Satety LOCKS ione RE 46244580545 HE 35 Clea et Ga OUE s RESTORE RS S DE 458 C
22. CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued 524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx id CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve
23. Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold During an active call touch the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen Only one call can be placed on hold at a time You can also press the amp button to toggle between the active and held phone call 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Join Calls When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Join Calls soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the we button or the end soft key Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial e Press the Redial soft key e or
24. Holding the RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward RW or forward FF will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the SEEK button during play mode to jump to the start of the current track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or press the VR button and say Next or Previous Track While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355 to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio e Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat i rum e Press the SHUFFLE button to play the selections on the USB iPod device in random order to provide an interesting change of pace To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SHUFFLE button again List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below will bring up Browse mode List mode enables scrolling through the list
25. If the tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine performance problems resulting from the use of running for more than a short period adjust the such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the manufacturer the vehicle Continued NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 462 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door on the right side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located on the driver s side door trim 2 Open the fuel filler door and remove the fuel filler cap Fuel Filler Cap 3 Hang cap by tether on fill door to prevent damage to body side ee STARTING AND OPERATING 463 CAUTION WARNING e Damage to the fuel system
26. If the Steering icon is displayed and the SERVICE POWER STEERING message is displayed the EVIC screen this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for potential service Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE e Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers e If the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system This system includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Control System TCS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Trailer Sway Control TCS Hill Start Assist HSA Brake Lock Differential BLD and Electronic Stability Control ESC These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically prevents wheel lock reduces stop distance and enhances vehicle control during stop When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight
27. Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC Off button This may be done while the vehicle is in motion STARTING AND OPERATING 427 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H Tire Markings e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure T Ten df 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and e lemporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo Temperature Grades rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure 428 STARTING AND OPERATING See compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design into the sidewall precedi
28. Radiator 0Amp A C Compressor Fan Enable RLY Red Clutch Coil kid mI Ma Ed N EN EMEN Feed 3 To BCM Blue Capacitor a MES mI MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555 Cavity Maxi Fuse Cavity Maxi Fuse 30 Amp EBL HVAC Blower Mo Green tor 20 Amp Fuel Pump 20 Amp Cigar Lighter Yellow Yellow 10 Amp ORC Sunroof LRSM Red Power Outlet 25 Amp ESC Console UCI Natural AUX Port Cigar ECM Fuel Injec Lighter Yellow tors Active Grill Shutter AGS Power Outlet Yellow Console Solenoid OBD Interior PDC Bat Vent Valve Oxy Ed tery Feed Power gen Sensor Heat Seats ers Bl HN 556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again NOTE When the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 35 days an Extended Park Start Procedure is required to start the vehicle Refer to Starting Proce dures in Starting And Operating for further informa tion REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type B
29. Repeat sub menu Once the Shuffle or Repeat sub menu setting is highlighted press the ENTER BROWSE button to select the setting and turn it on or off Shuffle and Repeat cannot be active at the same time If one is selected while the other is currently active the currently active one will be changed to OFF These settings will be dependent of the current source If shuffle is on in iPod moving to CD will not have shuffle On unless it was previously set to On Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA and CDDA MP3 NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display
30. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service The transmission is unable to shift itself automatically due to a fault condition Use the AutoStick mode to shift the transmission manually See your authorized dealer for diag nosis and service The transmission pump is overheating In AutoStick mode try to drive in one specific gear as much as possible avoid ing frequent gear changes In DRIVE the transmission will automatically modify its shift schedule to reduce the number of shifts The transmission driving clutch is overheating usually due to repeated launches in stop and go traffic Pull over and allow the transmission to cool in NEUTRAL until TRANS COOL READY TO DRIVE is displayed 398 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id MESSAGE DESCRIPTION TRANS HOT STOP SAFELY SHIFT TO P The transmission driving clutch has overheated Pull over and shift the transmission into PARK and allow the vehicle to cool until TRANS COOL READY TO DRIVE is dis played SERVICE TRANSMISSION A transmission fault has been detected See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service SERVICE SHIFTER A shift lever fault has been detected See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service ENGAGE PARK BRAKE The sensor that confirms PARK engagement is not function ing properly Engage the parking brake to ensure that the vehicle will not roll when in PARK Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is mon
31. Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e low road noise e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported fully cl a Owe e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be e dry weather condition compromised with the convertible top down e Even though the system is designed for users speaking Far End Audio Performance in North American English French and Spanish ac ae m e Audio quality is
32. and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 412 STARTING AND OPERATING PARKING BRAKE The parking brake lever is located in the center console Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up automatic transmission in PARK or manual transmission slightly press the center button then lower the lever in REVERSE or first gear completely When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash
33. for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle 536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to Keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs st
34. for further information Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 in 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri cant has become contaminated with water NOTE If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547 hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will Washing have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild The following maintenance recommendations will enable car wash soap and rinse the panels complete
35. is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 574 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box
36. provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags SABs Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Supplemental Passenger Side Knee Air Bag and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on several factors including the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and Front Passenger Knee Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors including the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and Front Passenger Knee Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce sub stantial vehicle damage for example some pole colli sions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand
37. push to operate the ignition switch Keyless Ignition Node KIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN Keyless Enter N Go Feature If your vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedure in Starting And Operating for further information NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Standard Blade Ignition Key If Equipped Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition system The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place You can insert the double sided standard blade key into the ignition switch or lock cylinders with either side up Standard Blade Ignition Key 020265786 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Key Fob If Equipped The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand Emergency Key Removal WIN 020207
38. s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel 460 STARTING AND OPERATING ee MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Material
39. the tire STARTING AND OPERATING 451 Base System a This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 452 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster a Inflate Tire to XX message will be displayed for a minimum of five sec onds and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The recommended cold placard pressure value is the pressure value in the Inflate Tire to XX message displayed in the EVIC The system will auto matically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish and the Inflate Tire to XX messa
40. tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539 Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 7096 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling sy
41. use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 CAUTION Continued CUPHOLDERS e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs Front Seat Cupholders only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces The cupholders are located in the center console forward sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the of the armrest between the front seats power outlet can cause damage Front Cupholders 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lighted Cupholders If Equipped Rear Seat Cupholders On some vehicles the front cupholders are equipped with The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the front between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned passengers The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer forward in the armrest and side
42. 1 Fold down the sun visor 2 Unclip the visor from the center clip 3 Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to to let the driver know that the system is operational The detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode rear front side of the vehicle when the vehicle is in PARK Rear Detection Zones BSM Warning Light NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 35 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 20 ft 6 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE e The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones e The BSM system detection zone D
43. 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 575 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Own
44. 523 Deck Lid Emergency Release uw pa Se EER 46 Deck Lid Power Release 45 Defroster Rear Window 275 Defroster Windshield 96 364 370 Delay Intermittent Wipers s ode Bas RR ER 95 221 Diagnostic System Onboard 520 Dimmer Switch Headlight de odin dette ds 217 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 545 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 540 Isa ld so ease ARMES ER EE 526 DOr LOCKS i s 2 aile ar P Urea p odes EE ED on 32 Door Locks Automatic 00008 34 Door Op ner Garage NE 249 Driver s Seat Back Tilt rss 201 Driving On Slippery SUTTACES ii s sie iens HE RR 408 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing ruo 44554462 cn ORDE SUE eo eae a ee Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy 586 INDEX M Electric Rear Window Defrost 275 Electric Remote WINGS 24504075444 RR Ed d 108 Electrical Power Outlets 242 d der up Ss 262 Electronic Brake Control System 415 Brake Assist Systeri lt ogie MR Le N ae age 418 Electronic Roll Mitigation 419 Electronic Stability Program 423 Traction Control System sos ike eher t sii 418 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM eusiemevdues 419 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 227 Electronic Stability Program ESP 423 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC MERE
45. 9 Sub menu Current Position Whenever there are sub menus available the position within the sub menus is shown here Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Messages e Front Seatbelts Unbuckled e Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled Service Airbag System Traction Control Off Washer Fluid Low Oil Pressure Low Oil Change Due Fuel Low Service Antilock Brake System Service Electronic Throttle Control Service Power Steering Cruise Off Cruise Ready Cruise Set To XXX MPH Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire s Inflate Tire to XX Service Tire Pressure System Parking Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low Service Electronic Braking System Engine Temperature Hot Battery Voltage Low Service Electronic Throttle Control Lights On Right Turn Signal Light Out Left Turn Signal Light Out Turn Signal On NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 e Vehicle Not in Park e Service Airbag Warning Light e Key in Ignition e Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled e Key in Ignition Lights On e Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled e Remote Start Active Key to Run e Front Seatbelts Unbuckled e Remote Start Active Push Start Button e Door Open e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Doors Open e Remote Start Aborted Too Cold e Trunk Open e Remote Start Aborted Door Open e Gear Not Available e Remote Start Aborted Hood Open e Shift Not Allowed e Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
46. Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incom ing and Missed Calls Voice Text Reply Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone and your phone is sup ported an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message e Press the ws button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages e Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages 3 You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Message e You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message press the VR button while the system is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M List of Preset Messages 11 See You in 15 minutes 1 Yes 12 I am on my way 2 No 13 I ll be late 3 Where are you 14 Are yo
47. E E ade EL Intermittent Wiper System sss va ss bee n 221 ai Se EE EE ae O Wiper Operation s e osse peda RR errei 22 ee HE OE CONSEIL adresse ie e ulti EH REK 222 ie SE enna ens O Windshield Washers 224 cedere EE Hew x 222 O Fog Lights If Equipped 219 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Wl Parksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped 231 aca EE N oe AE RE n O ParksSense DellSOPS 3 son pa IE eo ED Ra di 232 EL i C E E es O Parksense Warning Display 292 L EE ONA ese i O Parksense Display essais ERE TER HAAR ET 233 si E iis O Enabling And Disabling Parksense 240 N Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 227 4 Service The Parksense Rear Park Assist ELIO CHUTE us dot deo HP RT COH PUR VR 228 DUSIBDI ee ee ELS EAE RAS 240 Elle Der A Desited Speed u s ae satur uw dome 93 229 O Cleaning The Parksense System 243 0 lo Deactivate x iis Rd RR RAD N Rd 229 O Parksense System Usage Precautions 243 o To Resume Speed u sere 232 VREDE ER 230 W Parkview Rear Back Up Camera If To Vary The Speed Setting 230 EOU PPE e P ba qn a ag Ee DRR OP HR E a 245 o To Accelerate For Passing eara RS 231 nini i aM a DAT NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 M Overhead Console 00 4 248 W Power Sunroof If Equipped 258 O Front Map Reading Lights
48. Favorite soft key you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use e Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on
49. I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523 DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future
50. If Equipped 270 O Rear Window Defroster 270 O Rear Seat Armrest Storage If Equipped 271 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control lever under the mirror to the night position lever flipped toward the rear of vehicle xX Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you This feature will be defaulted on and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse 030434773 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse 030436523 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a muc
51. If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some thing Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued 402 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFE and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle Continued access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle ee STARTING AND O
52. Kelly omith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Voice Command VR button Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the amp button and say a command or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu You can also press the Or EVR buttons when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu NOTE Pressing the or EVR buttons while the system is playing is known as Barging In refer to Barge In Overriding Prompts for further information Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetoot
53. N Go To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU but ton To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pressing the brake pedal press the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal press the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Two Button EVIC If Equipped The system allows the driver to select information by This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering information by pressing the switches mounted on the wheel steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e Odometer e Digital Vehicle Speed ie VR amp e Trip Info e Range T
54. Out The Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch NING plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will go around your lap not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the plate into the buckle until you hear a click v buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued L2 gt c sd 022664339 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under
55. PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for approxi mately five seconds Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system is mal functioning the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the WIPE OFF REAR PARK ASSIST SENSORS SERVICE PARK ASSIST SENSORS or SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a fault condition the EVIC will display the WIPE OFF REAR PARK ASSIST SENSORS SERVICE PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 If WIPE OFF REAR PARK ASSIST SENSORS appears If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SENSORS or SERVICE in the EVIC make sure the outer surface and the under PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see an side of the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow authorized dealer ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer AM 760 WJR n MPH AM 760 WJR ba MPH 4 m P R Service Park Assist Sensors m R t 3 OOO wee oar i Service Park Assist Sensors
56. Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Unde
57. The Door Handle Button To Lock NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking e The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the door windows LES Power Window Switches 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation WARNING Do not let children play with the sunroof and never leave children in a vehicle with the Key Fob Occu pants partic
58. all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 1 4L Turbo Engine SAE 5W 40 synthetic engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 0L And 2 4L Engine SAE 0W 20 API Certified engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine If 0W 20 engine oil is not available SAE 5W 20 API Certified may be used as a temporary suitable alterna tive Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental
59. ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is ad equate With the engine off and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be be tween the bottom and top lines marked COLD FILL RANGE As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541 Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant bottle e Check the coolant freeze po
60. any contact with clothing TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex In case of an allergic reaction or rash consult a physician immediately Keep TIREFIT out of reach of chil dren If swallowed rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immediately 500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT A Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle s Hazard Warning flashers 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding 3 Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and turn Off the ignition 4 Set the parking brake B Setting Up To Use TIREFIT 1 Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to the Sealant Mode position 2 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose 3 Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire 4 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sea
61. bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from several air bag system components including the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING WARNING Continued e No objects should be placed over or near the air e Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster bag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front and rear seats Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are When the air bag deploys it opens the seam b
62. been set 3 20 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 21 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park 0qQ lights or headlights are turned on 22 Odometer Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the EVIC display It displays the gear position of the auto matic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVI
63. by side to provide conve Control Refer to Lights in Understanding The Fea nient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining tures Of Your Vehicle for further information a resting place for the rear occupant s elbows Light Ring In Front Cupholder Rear Seat Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 STORAGE Glovebox Storage The glovebox storage compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel Pull on the release handle to open the glovebox storage compart ment 035264419 Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment Glovebox Storage Compartment 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Console Features Pull upward on the release handle located on the front of An open storage area or cubby bin is located in the the armrest to open the storage compartment center console forward of the shift lever WARNING There is a storage compartment located under the center console armrest In addition the 12 volt power outlet Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart USB and Aux jack are located here ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury Center Console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 Door Storage The door pane
64. cause damage to the device and or to the connectors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB device while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect phone system Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons To get into the BISA mode press either AUX button on the radio or press the VR button and say Bluetooth Streaming Audio Play Mode When switched to BISA mode some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected and played Selecting Different Audio Device 1 Press PHONE button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Select Audio Devices 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect phone system to list audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or press the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next music track on your cellular phone Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or press the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to start at the begin ning of the current music track Brows
65. city traffic during hot weather or while towing a trailer or if you use the vehicle for police taxi or in a commercial fleet Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Replace the timing belt 1 4L Turbo Engine The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 569 WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your prd per D P 072 O Prepare For The Appointment 579 APrepare Dist 44444 d eed dran rra 979 O Be Reasonable With Requests 579 N If You Need Assistance 573 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 574 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 574 Ain Mexico COMING ea ses ERA AR cbe rg sse 574 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 575 ELDOPVICOLCOBULO E uos mes sie we ale sees E 575 Mi Warr
66. cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNINCG Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551 Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The in
67. clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h 416 STARTING AND OPERATING See ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip ment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa bility Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued WARNING Continued e The ABS cannot prevent the
68. closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset e press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Voice Command Uconnect Voice Command Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the Voice Command features press the vr button and say Voice Command Tuto rial For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a p
69. cloth and remove the Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products 550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx id Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPARS Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based
70. clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis sion Automatic Transmission If Equipped The automatic transmission and differential assembly are contained within a single housing The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and the fluid Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545 CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will require more frequent fluid changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental addi
71. coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old engine coolant antifreeze Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Continued 538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi
72. current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system 021836149 To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System Child Protection Door Lock Function 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a small coin into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged locked NOTE For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child Protection Door Lock System is engaged manually rotate the door lock button to the unlocked position roll down the window and open the door using the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE e Passive Entry may be p
73. depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 or ON RUN position If the ignition is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentaril
74. device currently playing can support these features Audio Selecting the Audio sub menu will allow you to adjust the Bass Mid Range Treble Balance or Fade just like pressing the Audio hard control If the BACK button is pressed the radio will return to the Main Menu NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 e Clock Selecting Clock will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the ENTER BROWSE button to set the minutes The minutes will highlight Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the ENTER BROWSE button to save time change System Info mm e Selecting System Info will display the software ver sion serial number and SIRIUS ID RADIO Button Press the button to select either AM FM and Satellite mode if equipped Buttons 1 5 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory AM A B C FM A B C and Satellite 15 AM 15 FM and 15 SAT stations 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press and hold the button 1 5 you wish to lock onto this station for 3 seconds You may add a second or third station to each pushbut ton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the A B C button to select the A B or C mode Each button can b
75. e Unlock the doors automatically NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doct
76. files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre en lin PIE Rate ps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Enter Browse Button CD Mode For MP3 WMA Play Pressing the Enter Browse button will bring up a list of all fol
77. first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE See Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 579 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and ma
78. inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying dat
79. inflate to the full size The air bags fully inflate in about 15 to 20 milliseconds Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on several factors including the severity and type of collision based on several factors including the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflators on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SABs exit through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SABs fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on several factors including the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side c
80. inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 445 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinati
81. is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer support visit www UconnectPhone com or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local applicable laws and phone use All attention should be focused on the safe operation of the vehicle Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 system Only one linked or paired mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French
82. languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone amp Button is used to get R into the phone mode and make calls show recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command VR Button i VR is only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The EVR button is also used to access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped Please see the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how to use the Sve button The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then g
83. left in the O Off position Blower control should be left in the ON position to allow the climate control to either warm or cool the vehicle Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise Soft key Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEE 4 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 5 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth a
84. lever shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped Heated Seats If Equipped The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by On some models the front seats may be equipped with using a lever located on the outboard side of the seat heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat height The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated using the Uconnect System WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time 030964924 Continued Seat Height Adjustment NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 i oa amp WARNING Continued iet Seat Operations Uconnect 8 4 and e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates Touch the Controls soft key located on the bottom of against heat such as a blanket or cushion This the Uconnect display may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a sea
85. mission is sufficiently warm ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving and many other situations Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position it can be moved forward and rearward This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used Moving the shift lever forward triggers a downshift and rearward an upshift The current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever rearward or forward unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho sen except as described below e The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated e You can start out from a stop in first or second gear Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting
86. moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings will be available e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Dim High Beams SmartBeam If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M make
87. more often 5 Install the passenger side console closeout NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil or refrigerants ig Body Lubrication E ps a Locks and all body pivot points including such items as 4 Install the A C air filter with the air filter position seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate indicators pointing in the same direction as removal tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as tab fully engages the cover MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533 wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and erit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the r
88. must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the key fob is unavailable or the battery is discharged see Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergen cies for instructions on shifting the automatic transmis sion out of PARK for towing CAUTION Do not use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Dam age to your vehicle may result from improper towing MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS H Engine Compartment 1 4L Turbo 517 W Maintenance Procedures 025 N Engine Compartment 2 0L 518 ECMO 2432644008 abet SE eee ae 524 N Engine Compartment 2 4L 519 El Eneine uL Filter e scu o ica serus b ENS se 527 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD I 520 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter 527 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 520 E Maintenance Pree Battery a chee ee eR ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance D Air Conditioner Maintenance HOR AM i sans Dm 521 Body Lubrication sisse 539 B Replacement Parts 000 522 5 Windshield Wiper Blades 533 EM Dealer Service iese awe DER DER ADD sess 523 o Adding Washer Fluid iese see 534 516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M EBxhaust Syste seri decuReLppERe eds 534 W Replacement Bulbs 0 556 ACoolng ESE ore tee bone ee ME om ea god Dor Mi Replacem
89. natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer STARTING AND OPERATING 417 Anti Lock Brake Warning Light The Anti Lock Brake Warning Light moni tors the ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake System Warn ing Light is not on If the ABS Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position h
90. of When you press the Uconnect Voice Command vr the Voice Command system to recognize user voice button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking give a command epee alee If no command is spoken the system will say one of two responses e I didn t understand e I didn t get that etc 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If a command is not spoken a second time the system will respond with an error and give some direction as what can be said based on the context you are in After three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR session with end Pressing the Uconnect Voice Command VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can say a command This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words Cancel or Help These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear available commands press the Uconnect Voice Command amp V
91. of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names n nm e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3
92. of menus and tracks on the audio device 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e In Browse mode the radio PRESET buttons are used e Browse button The Browse button will display the as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or top level menu of the iPod or external USB device external USB device Press and then turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to select This will dis e Preset 2 Artists play the next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device sub e Preset 4 Genres menu levels are available on this system e Preset 5 Podcasts CAUTION e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 3 Albums e Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any supported device anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or e Toexit Browse mode without making a selection press damage the device Follow the device manufactur the same PRESET button again to go back to Play er s guidelines mode Continued NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357 CAUTION Continued e Placing items on the iPod or external USB device or connections to the iPod or external USB device in the vehicle can
93. open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch or with the ignition in the Accessory or Run position for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close opera tion any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof pre
94. or emission control e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indi cator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 464 STARTING AND OPERATING e Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened e f the gas cap is not tighten properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Manual Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the manual fuel filler door release 1 Open the trunk 2 Pull right side of
95. over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position EN Driver Center Passene ger ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor ALR If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able
96. pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice The correct 2 Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded tightness of each wheel bolt is 95 ft Ibs 128 N m If in end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel Lightly tighten doubt about the correct tightness have them checked the wheel bolts with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or WARNING service station 7 After 25 miles 40 km check the wheel bolt torque To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle properly seated against the wheel has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 1 Mount the road tire on the axle N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the wheel bolts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each wheel bolt is 95 ft lbs 128 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the wheel bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are properly seated against the wheel TIREFIT KIT IF EQUIPPED Small p
97. places provided e Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Road Tire Installation Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 To ease the installation process for steel wheels with wheel covers install two wheel bolts on the wheel which are on each side of the valve stem Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt toward the wheel Lightly tighten the wheel bolts WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493 3 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover 4 Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel Lightly tighten the wheel bolts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack 060567721 do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may 1 Valve Stem 4 Wheel Cover result in personal injury 2 Valve Notch 5 Road Wheel 3 Wheel bolt 5 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 6 Finish tightening the wheel bolts Push down on the Vehicles Without Wheel Covers wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the wheel bolts in a star
98. press the amp and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF NOTE The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth connection It is recommended to press the transfer soft key when leaving the vehicle Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your operational you may reach the emergency number as chances of successfully making a phone call as to that follows for the mobile phone directly e Press the Se button to begin WARNING e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call Emergency or Dial Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Uconnect Pho
99. pressure in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 437 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the left side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check ti
100. rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags are located in the outboard side of the front seats and the rear seats if equipped NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Air Bag Warning Light A e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag e Supplemental Passenger Side Knee Air Bag e Knee Impact Bolster e Driver Advanced Front Air Bag e Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors e Occupant Classification System OCS Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air
101. screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal 2 Remove and replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves of the case together Make sure there is an even gap between the two halves If equipped install and tighten the screw until snug Test RKE transmitter operation General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a mi
102. sensor estimates the weight on the front passenger seat and where that weight is located The OCM communicates the classification status to the ORC The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be modified In order for the OCS to operate as designed it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt Properly seated passengers are e Sitting upright e Facing forward e Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort ably on or near the floor 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e Sitting with their back against the seat back and the WARNING seat back in an upright position Occupants in the front passenger seat sitting improp erly may cause the OCS to not classify the passen ger s weight accurately This may result in serious injury or death in a collision Always wear your seat belt and sit properly with the seat back in an upright position your back against the seat back sitting upright facing forward in the center of the seat with your feet comfortably on or near the floor Do not carry or hold any objects e g backpacks boxes etc while seated in the front passenger seat Holding an object may cause the OCS to not classify the passen ger s weight accurately which may result in serious Seated Properly injury or death in a collision 022665794 EN THINGS TO KNOW BEF
103. ssa 483 Hesdli hi OWI seu iode dub esee eee oe os 211 bled DiE aue dare ER Fita s AE 211 557 Headlights On Reminder ss sans She ues 214 Headlights On With Wipers 212222 LIU vele AE RS oe eA POE UE GA OK ZI High Bes dindicatOl sossa ae ot poo SOEUR es 288 High Beam Low Beam Select 217 MGM ated BOUY PME 23 Instrument Cluster s usse x ea EORR RN S 211 Intensity Control a sins aa KEER irpiri 218 linis PPP PP ARE HA DR os 218 nl I T m 959 N INDEX 591 Lents On Reminder etsy sees ne eens cess 214 L w bHel axe eee eee eee RARR eee 202 312 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 294 Oil Pressure a 24 EE RN STATES 293 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 220 co Fr RC 217 Keddie EER E STE EE HORE sas 217 248 Seat Belt Reminder 288 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 291 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator DIMGLIDECING xa 4444343 4485466944 BAR Theft Alarm Security Alarm Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS Traction Control occ haaeneeouenea coe RS TOG ODE x bee os DES BAR AN V Eod dos VO MITO na nek S RR Pee RR Gee Vol EE Cosa ESL E EE ER Seb eeee ep ee oes Warning Instrument Cluster Description 592 INDEX NEE T qLLALDAIILSI LUGuDHI 4n DDL NILLEL LILLLL Loading Vehicle 544545249546 RE 5545 oo 464 466 Capacities MAART AE SS OT OES NE 466 Mits siese Ceca ewe bee ee ee eee HORE 432 ks
104. the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 11 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped a This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con e trol ESC is off OFF 12 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 13 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 14 Power Steering System Warning This light is used to manage the electrical el warning of the EPS Power Steering System Refer to Power Steering in Starting and Operating for further information 15 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will
105. the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flashing or return to their normal color and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the up dated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Service TPMS Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the ve
106. the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations 476 STARTING AND OPERATING I o S TO So 057003766 057003765 Four Pin Connector Seven Pin Connector Female Pins 4 Park Battery 5 Ground 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 4 Electric Brakes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 477 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Manual Transmission If Equipped If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Automatic Transmission If Equipped The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting or changes in engine speed occur while in this range use the AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear ratio NOTE Using a lower gear ratio while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the transmission fluid and filter as specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Refer to the Maintenance Sche
107. the next phone connection Managing Your Favorite Phonebook There are three ways you can add an entry to your Favorite Phonebook 1 During an active call of a number to make a favorite touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone main screen NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 2 After loading the mobile phonebook select phone book from the Phone main screen then select the appro priate number Touch the next to the selected number to display the options pop up In the pop up select Add to Favorites 68 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out We 72 Phonebook gt Mobile gt Contact De Options Add to Favorites 248 123 4567 P e amp Ana Conda Moblic ir Favorites aw f 248 456 7891 mm 248 577 6215 SW Nav 1 Q q sil Phone More 030564868 NOTE If the Favorites list is full you will be asked to remove an existing favorite Cs Climate m i Oo d Player Controls 3 From the Phone main screen select phonebook From the phonebook screen select the Favorites soft key and then select the soft key located to the right of the phonebook record Select an empty entry and touch the on that selected entry When the Options pop up appears touch Add from Mobile You will then be asked which contact and number to choose from your mobile phone book When complete the new favorite will be shown 68 af FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out nnd Phone
108. the steering wheel is locked rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the key Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Keyless Enter N Go If Equipped This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the ENGINE SIART STOP button is installed and the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter is in the passenger compartment 050105203 Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while press ing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 381 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF po
109. tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types 448 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some direction
110. weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are four delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur 22
111. you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status touch and release the OFF Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the arrow back 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for sys tem function and operating information e Blind Spot Alert When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible aler
112. your selection touch the Auto High Beams soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Head lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection
113. 000 Ibs 907 kg GVWR and GAWR limits CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 450 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances ee STARTING AND OPERATING 475 WARNING Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake motoring safety system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision The Trailer Tow Package may include a four pin and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for ad NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle s ditional space between your vehicle and the ve Wiring harness hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate
114. 2 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See Mist Feature Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Headlights On With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wip
115. 2okcatapenneeqnee oe CR 320 nbl rr 320 Piel System Cato ous scs s ORR KERR SERE 463 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 249 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap sist sa Fe saan RR 462 520 Gasoline Fuel lt 44450 9 eae EE baa HERE BR 560 Woran FM PP Dm 320 Gasoline Clean Air eee 458 Gasoline Reformulated 458 Gauges Coolant Temperate os ues AE ORR EK ed 286 ll O T 290 PO ONNE s awe ue Y Wu UV Ep RE EE 290 Tachometer 14 9 cem rend KLEE was 284 eat IB SES nna eo Gay ee a abus eo eee RON 384 390 400 Gear Select Lever Override 511 General Information 20 28 145 179 457 General Maintenance less 523 Glass CIGNO a see aoe EO EE E ES EO ER 551 Gross Axle Weight Rating 0 468 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 465 467 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 117 a EEEEELLLIILLGIIIIIIULIUULISILLIIILLLIIULILLCAoQLLAALIL IaAJUAuUULL cCLC AALL I CL UAEAE LULA INDEX 589 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow ondine Waler sy 63 44 REEN aH PEU d ED Eg 409 Hazard Warning Flasher iles 483 Head Restraints es og x urbe ea eee need 205 Head Rests exceda SEES EIAS RAMS 205 Lie dii aces aco oes pog EA p AREAS e iow 997 Automatic isdie 4x4 eR EE RS 212 lese 2m P4 wesused eme PT eyes 550 lr A 212 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 217 Lights On Remin
116. 31 Tire Terminology And Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pres sure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure sure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 432 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door NEVER ENCEED AUS dum ut s TRES 2 TIRE l SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important informati
117. 467 020241333 Emergency Key Removal KIN NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster NOTE With the Uconnect system the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking b
118. 468 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either the front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certi fication Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market
119. 8 High Beam Indicator This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 9 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 10 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light w
120. Audio Selecting the Audio sub menu will allow you to adjust the Bass Mid Range Treble Balance or Fade just like pressing the Audio hard control If the BACK button is pressed the radio will return to the Main Menu e Clock Selecting Clock will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the ENTER BROWSE button to set the minutes The minutes will highlight Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the ENTER BROWSE button to save time change Player Mode e Player Browse Selecting Player Browse will go to the appropriate browse menu depending on the device currently playing will function the same as pressing the browse button while in that mode This will only appear in the menu if the device currently playing can support these features e Shuffle SHFL This function shuffles randomizes the order of the files This will only appear in the menu if the device currently playing can support these features e Repeat RPT When Repeat is activated the cur rently playing song will begin again when it ends It will continue to cycle through the same song until repeat is turned Off Repeat will be turned off once one for the following conditions are met 1 The source is ejected 2 A different track list within that source is initiated 3 The REPEAT button is toggled OFF This will only appear in the menu if the
121. Automatic ATC 9 2 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 286 484 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 87 Text Messa iip sense add EER REDE RD 194 Theft Alarm Security Alarm sa ske SEE RE 21 Theft System Security Alarm 21 Jib loer COMM ace aes ad vary V 3e n pg 4 224 Time Delay Headlight iss ee ae etos tm es 212 Tire and Loading Information Placard 432 Tire Identification Number TIN 430 Tite dIE ES vases arcani ques REOS RO ER Pes ep Di 427 Tire Safety Information 45 oe qoa ga 379 Ced EED 427 TIRE ud egeo a par soe ie ewe Si dod 495 o MEER DE EE OE AG 97 436 579 Meine Lite of Tires ia REY RARR RE D 443 DIU TOGUE 24224354 3 9 339 RR HE 436 Sr LC 446 598 INDEX M GAS NIE 3x 225599 3 299993 94 55 OR 293 484 487 C mpact Spare 425392394 92 98 ador gg d 440 DISP C HODIE uu pereo RR oe ee Res 484 General Information 436 LUSTDOSDBEO acus eis ood A eps eae ae a 438 Inflation Pressures sus deor E rae BEN RUE 437 Jack gU 3a moneo qb TuS beeen es aoe en 486 487 I3f6 8 Vrees oes tens ee ee ee ee ee 443 Load dpdelb goes eek es ees dees de 432 433 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 449 Pressure Warne Light ea eus codec Rea 284 Quality Gradio uesooes bee qx RR dE S 579 Radial 6 2 07 0 8 n5 soe Grae pa HR DIS HE 439 Replacement ae ohne eee UE PCR e oq 44 Ie cio Pr a E e aan ad 448 DU ee ee AE ae RD ORN De 427 436 DIGS Se lod eta EER GEOES
122. C Display The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 23 Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should turn on when the ignition switch is first placed in ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or turns on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices i e radio or slightly increase engine speed if at idle If the light remains on it means that the charging system is experiencing a problem See your local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 24 Oil Pressure Warning Light qm This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 25 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Bra
123. Check Fuel Cap Oil Change Due Service Tire Pressure System Inflate Tire to XX Coolant Low Rain Sensor Fail Traction Control Off Engine Warming Wait To Start Too Cold Plug In Heater Cruise Off Cruise Ready Cruise Set To XXX MPH Cruise Set To XXX km h NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled Front Seatbelts Unbuckled Door Open Doors Open Trunk open Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset Remote Start Active Key To Run Remote Start Aborted Door Open Remote Start Aborted Hood Open Remote Start Aborted Time Expired Remote Start Aborted Too Cold Remote Start Active Push Start Button EVIC Main Menu To step to each main menu feature press and release the UP button once for each step A step from the last item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list to be displayed The following features are in the Main menu e Odometer e Outside Temperature Display e Digital Vehicle Speed e Trip Info e Range To Empty e Fuel Economy Info e Cruise Control Info e Stored Messages e Tire Pressure 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Settings e Units e Language NOTE For features in the EVIC that can be reset Average Fuel Economy the EVIC prompts a reset with a RIGHT arrow button graphic and the word RESET next to it Trip Info Press and release the UP arrow button until the Trip Info icon is highligh
124. Control dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders if increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle equipped lights and ambient light located in the overhead console 031463857 Instrument Panel Dimmer Door Handle Ambient Light Dimmer 031463858 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer EVIC if equipped and radio when the park ing lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON RUN or ACC position The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column mist Sa WR ERE f eo LO 031563089 Windshield Wiper Washer Control NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when
125. Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This
126. E When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Keys or Key Fobs with RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau thorized operation This system may also incorporate a ultrasonic intrusion sensor that monitors for motion in the vehicle If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The S
127. E OFF Your phone must support SMS Short Message Service Player Controle Climate Moro 030564878 over Bluetooth in order to use this feature If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is not compat ible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the Messag ing button will be greyed out and the feature will not be available for use 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Read Messages Once a message is received and viewed or listened to If you receive a new text message while your phone is YOu Will have the following options connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement willbe e Send a Reply made to notify you that you have a new text message e Forward e Call Midi FM 95 5 Me Ill be there soon m Neply Forward Sn T 1 OFF Player Controls Climate EE NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Send Messages Using Soft Keys S Eke oa You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send messaging gt a new message 1 Yes e Touch the Phone soft key 2 No 3 OKay e Touch the messaging soft key then New Message 4 can t talk right now 5 Call me e Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person you wish to send the message to 6 lll call you later 18 items in iist B AE BA zz I ladio l layer Controls Climate e If multiple numbers are available for the contact select which number you would like to have the message sent e P
128. E PARTS Engine Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology meet ing the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 Engine Oil 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W 40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12991 Re fer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE erade Engine Oil 2 0L and 2 4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W 20 API Certified Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade If 0W 20 engine oil is not available SAE 5W 20 API Certified may be used as a temporary suit able alternative We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 025 in 0 65 mm 562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission 1 4L Turbo We recommend you use MOPAR C635 DDCT MTX Transmission Fluid Engine If Equipped Automatic Transmission 2 0L And We recommend you use SK Energy ATF SP 4 Transmission Fluid 2 4L Engine If Equipped Manual Transmission If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR C635 DDCT MTX Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec omme
129. E PD de pee eee as WOW Overhead Console Lamp W5W Exterior Lights Bulb Type Low Beam High Beam Bi Halogen Headlamp HIR2 Low Beam High Beam Bi Xenon Headlamp D3S Front Park Turn Signal Lamp 7442NALL oidemarker Lamp ser 233 4229 84 RE peor Oe a eee 194 Front Fog Lampe s N OD Chale H11 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer 7440 Backup Lamp License Lamp TT N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557 WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamps Halogen Headlamps Can be serviced by removing the cap from the backside of the headlamp Remove the HIR2 bulb from the con nector and replacing the bulb Reinstall bulb and cap High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there
130. EATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 CAUTION Continued Turning ParkView On Or Off With Touch Screen Radio e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to 1 Turn the Radio on Press the More soft key Press the Settings soft key 3 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Press the check box soft key next to Parkview ackup Camera to enable disable go dg V N 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEAD CONSOLE Front Map Reading Lights The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door can be turned on by pressing the lens Opener HomeLink and power sunroof switches may To turn the lights off press the lens a second time also be included if equipped 033365524 Front Map Reading Lights The lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed Overhead Console NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 Sunglass Bin Door At the front o
131. EEDE INTRODUCTION 944 5440 3 797309 oF 48 OS HOU ee ROC THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 22 2 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satis
132. EHICLE See 030907490 Push Button NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Rear Head Restraints The rear outboard head restraints have three positions UP MID and DOWN The center head restraint has only two positions Up and Down When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position When there are no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head Folding Rear Seat restraint To lower the head restraint press the push The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an button located at the base of the head restraint and push additional storage area To fold the rear seatback pull on downward on the head restraint the loops located on the upper seatback NOTE These loops can be tucked away when not in Push Button Rear Seatback Loops 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See After releasing th
133. ERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 EVIC Red Telltales This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera telltales include ture Warning Telltale illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure e Door Ajar fi This telltale turns on when one or more doors are ajar The telltale will show which doors are ajar WARNING 4 e Oil Pressure Warning Telltale wi This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on If the Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Charging System Telltale This telltale shows the status of the electrical charging system If the telltale stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system telltale remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing
134. ESE RR ees 428 DOW JCS soe soe E RS AR Oe De De 447 Pe TIE 25024865 ope nene da i oe ED oe 485 DPI AS RES DR oe pea Ob SEES P ys 442 Tread Wear Indicators 25 29 m n 442 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 470 jov APT 467 24 Hour Towing Assistance 131 Disabled Velidle sede ares Fake ee oh Res 513 Ee su cad EE PS REPE PG ERR EP EN ad 470 ReGeanOnal uo doceo Eos hen 2 ode RR GP E EDE 479 ign PPP OS 470 TOWING ASSISTANCE cauceson teed Heard em RE 131 DAON ess eie x Rune de p Re epa Sade 409 TACO Conto sae 2x 24 49 saaria ape ERR ORR 418 Trailer Sway Control ISC esea ues sesane mi 420 Mid le do dcs coss doro Sor dede x ed Rd Ro Eo 467 Coolie System JIPS 25d aces acres 478 Isid 24674 tenet ee N ET SE EET 469 Minimum Requirements sso e eg Sex d 472 Trailer and Tongue Weight 452249 RYS 470 WING ks sees RE EERS Spa d es 475 N INDEX 599 Trailer Jowo GUB 244545452400 RE IE E X ES 470 Paver WEI soeke P2 eens nea os REDE 470 Transaxle Automati see uh dee ee ew ee eee 380 Fine sie NR ROTE RICO AA AA OR AE aS es 407 Mandal ou 9 3999220429 959 8 3 25 9 379 Transmission Automatic 0 0 0 00 SE 0G 386 544 Filer ge tee dod ears epee sheets ous 545 Maintenance 2 000 eee ee eee 544 Manual oh te cece OE SN a SO nw ED 384 546 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink Transmitter Remote Ke
135. FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M example you can use the compound form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice com mands Phonebook and New Entry Please re member the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will then play some of the options To activate the Uconnect Phone simply press the S button and follow the audible prompts for directions Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the button on the steering wheel Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owners Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE If other phones are present during the pairing process make sure they are switched to off or the bluetooth is disabled before pro
136. IC CONDITIONER BTABRLITY 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION NN Id WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also is stamped into the right front body on the right front seat crossmember under the carpet and the vehicle registration and title 010864296 VIN Location INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING ues Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death P n E Right Front Body VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS HA Word About Your Keys 12 H Customer Key Programming 20 G Ignition Node Module IGNM If O General Information less 20 se TE EE diis W Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 21 O Keyless Ignition Node KIN It Equipped 13 E Rearming Of The Sy
137. IES 489 1 Remove the spare tire jack and wheel bolt wrench 2 If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the wheel bolts use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle 3 Before raising the vehicle use the wheel bolt wrench to loosen but not remove the wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 4 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange centering the jack saddle between the locating notches on the sill flange Front Jacking Location 060564689 6 490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES E 3 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the wheel bolts and tire 7 Mount the spare tire CAUTION Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem 060564690 Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the and install the spare tire spare tire is mounted incorrectly WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491 e Refer to Compact Spare Tire and to Limited Use Spare under Tires General Informa
138. INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position 2 Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporar ily put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE e Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the outside air position for maximum defogging e The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or Bi Level e Recirculated air is not allowed in Defrost modes If the Recirculation button is pressed while in this mode the LED indicator will flash several times then go out Recirculation will be disabled automatically is this mode is selected e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled 3 Temperature Cont
139. If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application Parking Brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 413 When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front WARNING Continued wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake uh before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever brake should always be applied whenever the driver is Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or not in the vehicle in a location accessible to children and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key es ehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Cont
140. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are programming 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e f the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed e To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your ve
141. Kear cac s ow ee Geng TRES 291 Parking Brake REMISE LLLLIILIULLILIIIUILLUILIIULLIILLILLLILCLLEILULIILI GoIA La L L OCaBOeBGGoGAGIAAa Id Pass ICN bee os 2G ok ee SU IRE ERE E RES 217 1 rrr 92 Phone Cell lar 229254 AI bare HE ware x s 117 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 117 Placard Tire and Loading Information 432 Power Deck Lid Release 126x229 A309 iS 45 Door LOCKS 43413 deRr and READ RR 9 33 Oee vi ve ees dese ee bees puede d wes 108 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 262 oni MEME 258 mmo r 41 LOU SES GOBIBE TIC douces arwaca act recs s tesa 562 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 59 Preparation for Jake a aca ck aen t iet tem nios 486 Pretensioners Seat Belts i e ee hs de RE REOS ERI SUO ds 58 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry iiec derer ee o 4 24 acp TE NIS cusa tp EF TERET Gy cue oe ees 439 KATO Pern oe ees SEER HEL Puer FOR DR nd 360 Rain Sensitive Wiper System iss kn ER ER ei 223 KAS MAAR ER ETE EI OT 245 Rear Cupholder is ie 29 3999 NR dpt a dcbet a 266 Rear Park Sense System iau ce suras e ERES 231 Rear sear Folge gerd S Xu cea eens ees 207 Rear Window Defroster 004 275 Rear Window Features sn eg DE ER yes cues 275 Rearview Mirtors ee ee rie n Gace HER BES arm Ead a 105 Recorder Event Data leeren 82 Recreational TOWLE ss ar BEA are PE RU bans 479 Retormulated Gasoline se cues phas om e 458 Remi eront
142. LE 125 Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book However if there is less than 10 contacts in the mobile phone the SIM contacts may also download This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Press the Se button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the EvR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M
143. Media Center 200 Sales Code RAE CD Player UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 CD Player Operating Instructions Loading To insert disc into the player follow the instructions shown 1 Gently insert the disc with the label facing the rear of the vehicle while the light below the loading slot is illuminated The disc will automatically be pulled into the CD player 2 Upon insertion the disc will begin to play and the light below the loading slot will turn off EJECT EJT Button If there is a disc in the CD player press the EJT button and the disc will eject If you do not remove the disc within 10 seconds it will be reloaded Uconnect If Equipped If equipped with Uconnect 8 4 refer to the Uconnect 8 4 manual for further information 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL iPod USB MP3 CONTROL WITH Uconnect VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates If equipped with Uconnect 8 4 refer to the Uconnect User s Manual for further details on iPod USB and MP3 usage Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle s USB AUX
144. Mobile Phone Or Audio Device Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the high est priority paired phone and or Audio Device within range If you would need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device follow these steps e Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch to select the particular Phone or the Paired Audio Sources soft key and then an Audio Device e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device e Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite e Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name e The options pop up will be displayed e Touch the Disconnect Device soft key e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device e Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the currently connected device e The options pop up will be displayed e Touch the Delete Device soft key e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Touch the Settings soft key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name The options pop up will be displayed Touch the Make
145. N Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second third and fourth gears direct fifth gear and overdrive sixth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driv ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these condi tions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup ee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits the transmission controller will modify the trans mission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating If t
146. NDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Enter Location Enter Number Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Phonebook Current Number is played New Entry Added Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Select Audio SMS Incoming Device Towing Announcement ie ag will English Espanol rompts temporarily or Francais omol Say 4 digit System Lists override Phones phone Select phone dicis Enter Name af phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists All Phones Deleted Mote Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Uconnect Phone 8 4 8 4N Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in veh
147. NEUTRAL cem Fon NOTALLOWED NOT ALLOWED oe NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOTE Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be recreationally towed flat towed at any legal highway speed for any distance if the manual transmis sion is in NEUTRAL and the ignition switch is in the ACC position WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Mi Hazard Warning Flashers 483 H TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation 496 H If Your Engine Overheats 483 O TIREFIT Usage Precautions 22012401444 497 W Jacking And Tire Changing 484 O Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT G Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 485 WiJump Starting Procedures O Preparations For Jacking 486 O Preparations For Jump Start O Jacking And Changing A Tire 487 O Jump Starting Procedure 4 amp 2 RR 507 O Road Tire Installation 4 oum mak ms 492 W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 509 N IIREFIT Kit If Equipped 405 W Shift Lever Override auo cas queen seeds S ME OTIREFIT Storage amp Ek seed eR RE os 495 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle 518 482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M D Automatic Transmission 513 O All Transmissions sns 514 O Manual Transmission 514 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel Press the switch to turn o
148. NG THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 WARNING WARNING Continued e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down WARNING position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Continued 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued Cargo Tie Downs The rear cargo area is equipped with cargo tie downs e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear located on either side of the rear cargo ar
149. NT BEAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 2 130 lbs ses jata a aranana ce erede n n S EXAMPLE 2 aaa Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 lbs rant ea oe fana ana ert EE EE Ie iaa anas od s Eg nal ae ae eke ees Es ee Ee BEE EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 lbs 811a4d11 436 STARTING AND OPERATING xe WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting areas are affected by improper tire
150. O 046170579 Uconnect 200 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME b control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons KK DP to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will by pass stations without stopping until you release it 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours are highlighted 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side ENTER BROWSE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will highlight 4 Adjust the minu
151. OES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side of the vehicle side and enter the rear detection zone with a r
152. OLUULa A ND 93 Mode Fuel Saver a6 4 es oh a week p RHEE ORS 320 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 449 WIG Pan Pals 6 34 3 6 2 verd i de date dco X RSS 522 9 6 MIBE ETBE 2264000644 6204400008054 siyi 458 Multi Function Control Lever 216 Navigation System Uconnect gps 245 New Vehicle Break In Period 93 Occupant Restraints 0 0 47 65 79 Occupant Restraints Sedan 63 64 65 77 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 457 Odometer ees 292 Oil Change Indicator 22 sx roe es 293 299 Oil Change Indicator Reset 293 299 CAL HOLD iese ORE AE ER De ERA 524 560 Capac 263992 EERBARE IR songs 560 Change Interval 64665 EE SR DE ERES DEE 525 Checking 44 onse EE RE MED bax ERNS DE 524 Dipo MEE OR EE OE enters a 526 A NE SE ER ER PRERE 527 Materials Added to SS SS 526 Recommendation s 525 560 WMISCOSIDU s vea eee sees tena Pu E Eu ne PR E 526 Onboard Diagnostic System 520 521 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 249 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors less 106 Overhead Console llle 248 Overheating EHglie sees drm cay ow SE 286 483 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 577 Pale Cane RT 546 Panic Alaf oes bee ye Gee EA I eR Se ES 26 Park Sense System
153. ORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 The OCS may not classify the front passenger properly if e The front passenger s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door arm rest or instru ment panel e The front passenger leans forward sideways or turns around e The front passenger seatback is not in the full upright position e The front passenger carries or holds an object while seated e g backpack box etc 022665795 Not Seated Properly 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 022665796 022665798 Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 022665799 022665973 Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Placing an object on the floor under the front pas senger seat may prevent the OCS from working properly which may result in serious injury or death in a collision Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger The Air Bag Warning Light will tum on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the air bag system If the Air Bag Warning Light Af does not come on or stays on after you start the vehicle or it comes on as you drive take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately The front passenger seat is equipped with Flip n Stow Front Pas
154. PERATING 403 CAUTION e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the OFF posi tion to the ON RUN position press the brake pedal and press the button on the front of the shift knob Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle 404 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE id WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTIO
155. Please wait dba E 4 _ a I ladio A D Climate Nav More 030564866 5 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range l layer Controls hone Pair Additional Mobile Phones e Touch the More soft key to begin e Touch the Settings soft key e Next touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take pre cedence over other paired phones within range NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 68 4 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out w 72 Bluetooth Pairing Bluetooth pairing successful Motorola 5149 Make this phone your favorite Yes dal E sw Nav C Climate gt 3 uf Player Controls Phone More NOTE For phones which are not made a favorite the phone priority
156. R button and say Help You will hear available commands for the screen displayed Natural Speech Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly omith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Uconnect Voice Command Sve button Uconnect Voice Commands The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect Voice Com mand Sve button Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command Sve button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable l
157. RANSMISSION TRANSMISSION NONE NOT ALLOWED Trans in NEUTRAL DIRE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED add NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Flatbed BEST METHOD BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent Automatic Transmission damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other Automatic transmission vehicles can be towed with the equipment designed for this purpose following equip front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck all four 6 ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is wheels OFF the ground mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to CAUTION main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers iated brackets Stat d local di ee OTACKES DAE ANd Ova AWS TESE DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an vehicles under tow must be observed automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result 514 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Manual Transmission e Manual transmission vehicles can be flat towed all four wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL e Manual transmission vehicles can also be towed with the front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck all four wheels OFF the ground CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any disabled vehicle if condition is related to a clutch transmission or driveline compo nent Damage to the drivetrain could result All Transmissions If you must use the accessories wipers defroster etc while being towed the key
158. S oo insae A aos EERS SURE E E ed 213 Snow Chains Tire Chains 446 MOW TUBES 4 aya Ge EEN RED EISE ew 447 Oats PPP 440 441 485 Specifications RES EER AE EET OR RES 525 Speed Control Cruise Control 227 DDEGCODIBIGE 24744 EXER ARE Ve ESOS e Rud 05 edes 290 vun P 28 379 Automatic Transmission 380 Eneme Fails to Start ibexexc 9444284 YS 382 Manual Transmission 379 Remote 244 444 bee ER Kd d edd ES PRE 28 a EEEELLLIILLIGIIIGUULIILUIIILIIU LLLIILCCLLCL UULLLAeA LLLNAe e e 1L LGIIAL GU GGLUIA VAUaABGG u AU4SuLIe INDEX 97 SUNS Produts 4 144 editis Es Eee iiep 379 Steering lke GOOI ssas a dud det ordre Radar 216 Colina LOCK asus cr dox ean eas pen ees 224 TU C OD ie Ai a ba hae eee A Sui 224 Wheel Heated eee 225 M heel EHE 2 25cm Bowe EE ee es RS Sp 224 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 358 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Sold MP 358 vnjc PC 267 556 viter loire PC 374 xus Mu cl Cr OE ane as 509 DUM Koel 44 6 phew eet ate de 304 Voce SITE ED 258 Diti VISOP EXTENSION si bid Aa ma dre RD RD os 109 Sunglasses Storage see VER PRE RAAR HEER ER 249 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 60 wa Gone Laer sn RIA EERS EER De De 420 Dy stem Remote DIIS 245454 2 2 PEER DE ba 28 TAGHOMIGIGE 24 325 suc bobs ee NAT RS eee MEE 284 Telescoping Steering Column 224 Temperature Control
159. SE OT EE 2n 245 297 Emergency Deck Lid Release ea or xs 46 Emergency Trunk Release a cessa aio es 46 Emergency In Case of Preeing Vehicle When Stuck aka s 509 Hazard Warning Flasher 422240420 0 s 483 WACO P H n 484 MIP EEND asse os seke ei EER Ee MP RS 505 Ouer esse EE 9 483 TOWING oes ier eee eae eee se PUE duca DE qd 513 Emission Control System Maintenance 521 Eise 22245939 39 0239 2 X99 4 0 24 X443 518 519 Plock ICA soon dur EE Edo DE OR 383 Break In Recommendations 93 Checking OU Level sae nd EE DE 524 COIDPOEPHBELIT aoa apo drap aw es Pd RC EX 517 Sek AR Ee OE PG 997 Exhaust Gas Caution 94 461 Fidel Requirements 2 4 6 vec as xem ERA 457 JP Pat usa sace sesse ce HOES De 505 Oil 2 dauws ais Gh han ado eee cee 924 560 561 Oil Chance Milervol oase ia see hod HR e dd 525 Oil Filler Cap ees rea 40 4 xem ichs 518 519 526 il Eilers 29 a E rs 561 Oil DelechOW 47 42 4b a4 oh oh Sd AREAS DR 525 usus Ferr OE 483 N INDEX 587 lemperature Gauge y casas dean REDE ee hs 286 Flashers Enhanced Accident Response Feature 78 Hazard GENE asse perde hone ARE ee 483 Entry System Illuminated 2l m vas 23 TU sie usse girre IIIA Moro d 97 216 286 Dia ie PR 450 Flat Die Changing errer booq nee SSG epa 9s 484 Event Data Recorder xeu a eh da DRR ERAS pora 52 Flooded Engine Starting 33d adds dad toads 382 Exhaust Gas Caution 000 94 461 Floor C
160. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Touch the Controls soft key then touch the Heated Steering Wheel soft key to turn on the heated steering wheel Press the Heated Steering Wheel soft key a second time to turn the heated steering wheel off 21910 950 2 tune audio Het lt lt aJ OFF gt J Controis I Player More 030564872 Climate Controls Soft Key udi FM 95 5 Controls pas Passenger Hented Sent Driver Hented Sent Heated Wheel 2 Player Screen OFF Coe L 65 I1 Climate TX Controls More Phone Heated Steering Wheel Soft Key NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures espe cially if used for long periods Continued WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the ste
161. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions e Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging When the defrost mode is selected the blower level may increase NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371 13 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in 5ync will automatically exit this feature Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings NOTE e f fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed e f your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and th
162. Traction Control System TCS The system monitors the amount of wheel spin at each wheel by using individual wheel speed sensors If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide en hanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls ee STARTING AND OPERATING 419 the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Elec tronic Stability Control ESC in this section for more information Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factor
163. UN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE e Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons e If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 252 Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink has receive
164. Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touch screen or press the SVR button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the EvR button and say Send 3 7 4 6 Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For example if you previously created a Phone book entry with First and or Last Name as Voicemail Password then if you press the EvR button and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored e You
165. Whenever the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted Refer to Partial Off for additional informa tion Partial Off The ESC Off button is located in the switch bank above the climate control To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESC Off button and the ESC Off Indicator Light will illuminate To turn the ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off button and the ESC Off Indicator Light will turn off This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation 426 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING e When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature de scribed in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Partial Off mode the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced Trailer Sway control TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode NOTE When driving with snow chains or when start ing off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to allow more wheel spin when starting off in snow mud sand gravel or when using tire chains This can be accomplished by momentarily pressing the ESC off button to enter partial mode Partial Off mode
166. a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC Ii 13PFD41 126 AF 6th Edition Printed in U S A
167. a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Telltale This telltale informs you of a problem with the XA Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If the telltale comes on while driving have the sys tem checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the telltale will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The telltale should turn off If the telltale remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the telltale is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Telltale E This telltale warns of an overheated engine condi DI Dj tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this telltale will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold If the telltale turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperatu
168. a routinely acquired during a crash investigation NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front Occupants especially children should not lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the SABIC or SAB air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint f
169. additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527 station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner fi
170. age at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Recent
171. age and a new RTE value will display Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu Miles Per Gallon MPG The Miles Per Gallon MPG feature displays instanta neous fuel economy in a bar graph below the RTE this function cannot be reset Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu Trip Info 2 Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow fries button until the Trip Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the following three trip fea tures in the next screen e Trip A nu dn jn V in e Trip B e Flapsed Time Elapsed Time 00 00 00 Distance 999 9 Average mpg 00 TRIP INFO Trip A Trip Info Analog Display 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 760 WJR j Elapsed Time AM 00 00 00 999 9 00 Distance Average mpg Trip Info Digital Display Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions or press the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu The Trip Functions mode displays the following information Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the ON or START position Resetting A Trip Info Function To Reset any of the three Trip Info func
172. aintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO WARNING AREA Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless WARNING Breathing it can make you unconscious and can e Do not leave children or animals inside parked nisse e dn 10 SNOIdcbrcstung EO vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may Wes d NM de oe cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people e Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats an
173. al tires that must not be reversed EJ ER c EA E 055707139 Tire Rotation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 449 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire press
174. and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental approved by the manufacturer for your air condi Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning flammable and can explode injuring you Other service be performed by authorized dealers or other unapp
175. anty Information 576 B MOPAR Parts aono IE OE RENE 576 W Reporting Safety Defects 576 O In The 50 United States And Washington prop C ee eee eee ee ee O In Canada N Publication Order Forms 572 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O Traclion Grades uad HR ER RR 9 ti 579 Quality eur Pr pka RER 579 O Treadwear eet GO ve bd HR SES HESS Remus 579 Temperate Grades 25 iore do eruere SS 580 NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 573 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it
176. ar range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 WARNING WARNING Continued e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if itis not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward with the brake pedal released after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed
177. ar the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 CAUTION e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the OFF posi tion to the ON RUN position press the brake pedal and press the button on the front of the shift knob Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle 394 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never tu
178. are shown in bold face and shaded grey 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Voice Command Travel Link commands The commands can be said on any screen when a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect voice command button t v VR on the steering wheel I Screen will Screen will Screen will Screen will Screen will Screen will Screen will change to change to change to eds fur change to change to change to Travel Link Travel Link Travel Link Travel Link Travel Link NFL a Movie Home Fuel Prices Weather Listings Sports Favorites Headlines 030563045 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 NOTE 1 You can replace NFL with any league shown on the sports league screen For example you can say Show MLB headlines or Show PGA headlines 2 You can replace Headlines with any menu items shown on a league screen For example you can say Show NFL Schedule and results or Show NCAA Basketball AP top 25 or Show Major League Baseball Teams 3 You can also say Show Current Weather or Show extended weather or Show five day forecast or 5how ski info to get other forecasts 4 Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Voice Command Non phone Universal amp Mode Commands The commands can be spoken on any screen when not on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect voive command but
179. arning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac tivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the
180. art shows the warning alert opera tion when the system is detecting an obstacle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 WARNING ALERTS Rear Dis Greater than 79 59 in 59 47 in 47 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than tance 79 in 200 150 cm 150 120 cm 120 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in in cm 200 cm 30 cm None Single 1 2 Slow for Slow for Fast for Fast Continuous Second Tone rear center rear center rear center for rear only only only center only Arc Left None None None None None 2nd Flash 1st Flashing Rear ing Arc Cen None 6th Solid oth Solid Ath Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flash 1st Flashing ter Rear ing Arc Right None None None None None 2nd Flash 1st Flashing Rear ing 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the Uconnect System The available choices are Off Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the ParkSense soft key is pressed to disable the system the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYS TEM OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the
181. asher system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535 WARNING CAUTION e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain e The catalytic converter requires the use of un carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle
182. ask you which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith e f your phone does not support phonebook download e You can replace Mobile with Home Work or or call log download over Bluetooth than these com Other d mands will return a response that the contact does not l exist in the phonebook e You can replace 4 with any message number shown on the screen ou E tepl uem Incoming Calls with Outgoing e Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and Calls or Missed Calls underlined in the gray shaded boxes e Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconncct Text Messaging Resding Text Messages The ex amr ete cori bee og skoei wl wan Hoe bard nsocoap ede oodaran Uconnect Text Messaging The Gore xke ces Lae spuien bon ag hy sowan aha piding Das Doonwwact Phioras bution on the steering whee ater puting hc Uconncct phone tution p on the zicceing wheel 3 F hea vaar Enter message from defined kA provide messaging in by amp eyetem or say box List to hear al 18 downloaded defined messages fram phane While the message trad is Say Yes displayed the following to send the text is read outthe commands are available after panna fnlinwing commands pushing the Uconncet phont are avisksble ssuloeislically
183. ation with the Passive Entry feature lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the TRUNK SAFETY WARNING trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow in the WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke Trunk Emergency Release NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers e Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Knee Air Bags e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupant e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event Please pay close att
184. ave the light repaired as soon as possible 418 STARTING AND OPERATING See If both the Brake System Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slip pery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others
185. b 5 is on Air Mode and the pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 sec onds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 5 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from ap proximately 70 psi 5 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty 2 The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire pres sure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes e The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn off the TIREFIT kit 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of t
186. be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support 030970657 Power Lumbar Switch Manual Front Seat Forward Rearward Adjustment On models equipped with manual seats the adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats near the floor 030964925 Front Seat Adjustment While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 Em reached the desired position Then using body pressure L3 y move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted Recline Lever seat belt WARNING Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the KEEL LE IOSU SO HIA Ue outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired position and release the lever To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the
187. bee ee NEE ee E N E 52 Auto Unlock dT 2 MAER ke eo Ss ae 34 Automatic Door 2 9 wes 34 Child Protection xac ue xede bus ox EE 95 Be AU 32 Power Door siese se PERD ee des SE 33 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren CAR srai tue co ee PS erer oe E RE ed 87 88 Lubricaton Dod wasse bone CA EUR dete e 532 Maintenance Free Battery sosiale ERK x eas 028 Maintenance Procedures een 523 Maintenance Schedule 564 Maintenance General eee 523 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 294 521 Manual Transaxle 379 Manual Transmission 0 384 546 Fluid Level Check sess 546 Frequency of Fluid Change 546 Lubricant Selection sss 546 hik Deeds ee sin en Pur es ae eo 384 Manual Service ie 40 584 444 64648 Hae OE EEE 577 Master Cylinder Brakes sa wis kere Ee SS WS 542 Methanol eh 458 Moi Hip Comput saw aoc d pd wes Vue x eg 303 MIO aya ok arator wd ded dc Sar ER d EE 105 AUtOMate IMMUNE dues dee oda cae PR Re 105 Electric Powered 422v BEE AAS bh RES 108 Electric Remote eren 108 Exterior Folding 424 93 9 ur v3 ctu titii 107 Heated ee ee 108 enc MMC 106 Rearview ee ee ns 105 WAI amu Geechee eke eee AS RS SES 109 a EEEEELLLIIIILLIGIIIIULIILIIIIUIIILUIII IILLLIIL A L Le UGAGULIALLI OCDG ELU amp HGSoI UAGUU AGZG A PGO SHPAULL LeLAU ID eJABG IA G G O
188. book gt Favorites Options f Voicemail Add from Mobile Empty es Ka Mom s Cell Emergency Towing Assistance items in list y bd as Pm b A Radio Player Nuy is C Climate More Controls Phone 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Remove A Favorite 68 yf FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Ww 72 i E d Ph ebook gt Favorites PES e To remove a Favorite select phonebook from the Options y Phone main screen Mobile ES e Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and Favorites then touch the Options soft key C Voicemail Remove from Favs EM Buddy s Pizza Mom s Cell e Touch the next to the Favorite you would like to remove e Emergency 5 items in list Sy Y Gs aw P Le t Pinyor Controls Climate Nav Phone More e The Options pop up will display touch Remove from Favs NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Emergency And Towing Assistance The Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can only be altered These cannot be deleted and the names cannot be changed To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these steps e Touch the Phonebook soft key from the Phone main screen e Touch the Favorites soft key Next scroll to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Favorites e Touch the Options soft key e Touch the next to appropriate Favorite that is to be altered
189. button 4 times 9 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and continue in a clockwise direction until 200 degrees past center 10 Turn the ignition to off position 11 If procedure was done correctly ESC malfunction lamp will flashfour times after engine starts 12 Procedure must be completed within 90 seconds 13 Repeat the condition to re enable Hill Start Assist HSA HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped 422 STARTING AND OPERATING xe e Vehicle must be on a 2 7 approximate grade de Towing With HSA pending on equipped transmission HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer e Gear selection matches vehicle direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear WEANING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a HSA will work in all forward gears reverse and neutral if equipped with a manual transmission when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 7 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer
190. button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See 4 Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink has received the fre quency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed e To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the ind
191. cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlatch The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch
192. ceeding NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions Press the Se button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Device Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Device and follow the audible prompts For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked Should paired device be set as Favorite f yes this phone will become the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile e phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time e Start paring procedure on device See device manual for instructions Select Uconnect on the device and enter the four digit Personal Identification Number PIN displayed on radio into your mobile phone Dial By Saying A Number Press the Se button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Uconnect Phone
193. ceived by the radio E 3 You can replace 8 with any other satellite station named received by the radio 4 You can replace rock with any of the satellite music types 5 Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Uconnect Hands Free Music Control These commands can be spoken when playing music from your SD card USB device CD or iPad after pushing the Uconnect voice command button q VR an the steering wheel n Radio will play the Radio will play the Audio Book Dr Radio will play Podcast Weekly Jekyll and Mr track 8 Auto Podcast Hyde Radio will play the album Ragtime Radio will pay EE n Radio will play Radio will play the the Artist Scott Song Maple Leaf Joplin Rag the Genre Rock T unes Favorites 030563046 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 NOTE 1 You can replace the album artist song genre playlist podcast and audio book names with any corresponding names on the current device that is playing 2 You can replace 8 with any track on the CD that is currently playing Command is only available when CD is playing 3 Playlist Podcast and audio book commands are only available when the iPod is connected and playing 4 VR commands Albums Artists and Genre names are based on the music database provided by Gracenote 5 Available Voice Commands
194. celerator pedal and repeat the Normal Starting procedure NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 383 WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not continuously crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time Wait 60 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up Turbocharger Cool Down If Equipped This vehicle is equipped with an after run pump to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off Depending on the type of driving and the amount of cargo the pump will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger Although the pump is rubber mounted for quiet opera tion it is normal to hear it running during this time ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electro
195. chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 5 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator tul Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and correct
196. ck arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Units When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings Io change the Voice Response Length touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route To make your selection touch the Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft ke
197. cle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M lt A The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal eo when the turn signal lever is operated Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho 4 Temperature Gauge rized dealership for service The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on a continuous
198. conditions are true e The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter e The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the Passive Entry door handles e The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs e There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 5 ft 1 5 m of either Passive Entry door handle e Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 To Enter The Trunk NOTE If you inadvertently leave your vehicle s Passive With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the 1 0 m of the deck lid press the button on the right side deck lid the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless of CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Light which is another one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmit located on the deck lid ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid To Lock The Vehicle s Doors With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handles press the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors 021864389 Trunk Passive Entry Button 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Do NOT grab the door handle when pressing the door handle lock button This could unlock the door s Do NOT Grab The handle When Locking Press
199. connect System e and have network coverage NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Roadside Assistance If you need roadside assistance e Press the Se button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Roadside Assistance NOTE e The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Roadside Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Roadside Assistance references e f supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Roadside Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or aut
200. connector port which is located in the center console Center Console USB AUX Connector Port 047464293 Center Console USB AUX Connector Port Cable Routing NOTE The center console will have a position where the iPod or consumer electronic audio device cable can be routed through without damaging the cable when closing the lid A factory cut out space for the cable to be routed may be located in the base of the center console on either the front or side This allows routing of the cable UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 without damaging it while closing the lid If a cut out is not available in the center console base route the cable away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the lid to close without damaging the cable Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s iPod USB MP3 control system iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the iPod9 USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Using This Feature By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to USB port e The audio d
201. cution 384 STARTING AND OPERATING ee MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline CAUTION Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch NOTE During cold weather you may experience in creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up This is normal Shifting Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal You should always use first gear when starting from a standing position Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up shift speeds may not apply Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH KM H En eine 1 4L Accel 2 0L 39 55 76 90 and Cruise 10 16 19 27 37 4 2 4L 31 43 60 66 En gines Downshifting Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recom
202. d be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the OFF position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the OFF position and the shift lever is locked in PARK NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key fob in the ignition cylinder switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To move the shift lever out of PARK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 Six Speed Automatic Transmission 1 4L Turbo Engine Only DDCT The shift lever position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the
203. d seat belts Continued Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 WARNING Continued e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc
204. d the fre quency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid 5 At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the
205. d weather NOTE e Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur e Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will automati cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Main taining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instructions STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS l Starting Procedures 0 379 ELATIOT SPELD serege cca RE Qe EE oe d 383 o Manual Transmission If Equipped 379 D Turbocharger Cool Down If Equipped D Automatic Transmission If Equipped 380 W Engine Block Heater If Equipped O Keyless Enter N Go If Equipped 380 W Manual Transmission If Equipped EL Normal SANE s was chased EER HER RE 380 AODUNN uas ches ORAAL REUS DEE RARR 384 O Extreme Cold Weather SABS aa MNE 6244452545 ER RO pti 385 OE a aes aa ia ll Automatic Transmission If Equipped
206. der s 214 On TEL VADERS ME 21222 ccc P ben di Re ble ERA ER ee os 2p Switch ees 211 diie Deli D 212 Heated Mirrors iis eed ee bee ER HS S 3c ES 108 Heated Seats uoi ERA ISO SES EES SEES 202 Heater 12220 P EXER eee eda se RS EE SE 361 Heater Engine Block ii es xeu eR STIS 383 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 217 HN Start ASSIS Jace oa one amp xu DUE cr ewe rad 420 Hitches Tigiler TOWO ok R33 999 9 2 9 ES ees ds 469 Holder C Ol 439 553 493 edF Sonde RSS 268 FIGIGC C UD Siete Sacre ee og cp dE irs 265 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 249 Ignition O PITT 12 Hurinated FOUY 124 eae bord d wee eee E Rd 25 Immobilizer Sentry Key uuu uoo a 4 o ia ER ai woe 19 Infant Restraint ione Ex bee vdo3 9 OER RS 83 84 Information Center Vehicle naaa aaa 297 Inside Rearview Mirror less 105 Instrument Cluster een 281 284 Instrument Panel and Controls 280 Instrument Panel Cover RISO LLLLLLLLIIIILIGILULLILIIIIIILLLUIIIIIIIULIUUIILELTILSCLAO LAAL LICeA LLGLAGO lA M2 1liu ALH AL BGdZG eLIOLIAG G BUGGSHALUGALHIALAuLULLS LSqdULA A4UG BG OoUIAiAlLAALPZ Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning oo Interior Appearance Care xs vates ds egrisi 550 mo OES e oe ee US pras 218 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 221 attod He nTen 2 soe EE E 4 Jack LOCION 4s 84 45 os ae ROSE EE HEURE dU EMS 485 seis si
207. ders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Se lecting a folder by pressing the ENTER BROWSE button will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speak ers Pressing the PLAYER button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE e The head unit will have no control of the AUX device You can only control the volume on the head unit No information about the song will be displayed e The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the pro
208. display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for approximately five seconds Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SENSORS message to be displayed in the EVIC 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION WARNING e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable e Drivers must be careful when backing up even to recognize every obstacle including small ob stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle
209. dited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit Entry can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit Entry feature Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from the Uconnect Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use e Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHIC
210. dule NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for the first condition that it detects In addition the EVIC will display a Inflate Tire to XX message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing or displayed in a different color The recommended cold placard pressure inflation value is the pressure value displayed in the Inflate Tire to XX message displayed in the EVIC Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value The system will automatically update the Inflate Tire to XX message will no longer be displayed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 455
211. dule for the proper maintenance intervals AutoStick When using the AutoStick shift control select the high est gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade or road conditions allow 478 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Cooling System Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads W oe pou ur CBE aH ana ver eating take the following actions When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage it until you can get back to cruising speed City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase the engine idle Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to speed maximize fuel efficiency cdita Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily ee STARTING AND OPERATING 479 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission Flat Tow None NOT ALLOWED e Transmission in
212. e STORED MESSAGES 4 j 1 Tire Pressure Digital Display Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS under Starting and Operating for further information 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Coolant Temperature Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Coolant Temperature is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button and the coolant temperature will be displayed Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy icon is high lighted Press the RIGHT arrow button and the next screen will display the following E e Average Fuel Economy Miles Per Gallon MPG Bar graph e Range To Empty RTE e Current Miles Per Gallon MPG 27 4 438 miles 35 mpg gt O Hold gt to reset FUEL ECONOMY Fuel Economy Analog Display Kaskade e 438 mi 35 mpg Hold to reset FUEL CONOMY Fuel Economy Digital Display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 The EVIC has the capability of displaying an interactive flower through the Fuel Economy sub menu which will add one flower pedal for every 2 5 Miles Per Gallon MPG increment Once the vehicle reached 30 MPG the EVIC will display a full flower F L Y 3 TOK to Repel ener 12567 miles 14 28 Fuel Ec
213. e Browsing is not available on a BISA device Only the current song that is playing will display info STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches aie 045035190 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359 Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUN etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD
214. e Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a mini mum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation STARTING AND OPERATING 457 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 1 4L Turbo Engine This engine is designed to me
215. e Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse e Remote Start Aborted Time Expired e Autostick Unavailable Service Required e Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset e Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req e Service Airbag System e Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Trans Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool e Transmission Cool Ready to Drive e Service Transmission e Service Shifter e Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling e Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On e Washer Fluid Low The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left EVIC Amber Telltales This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Low Fuel Telltale When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal 7 5 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator it This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind e shield washer fluid is low e Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale If Equipped This telltale indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this telltale turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEU TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off UND
216. e Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command se button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command EVR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 VOICE COMMAND WARNING Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav The Uconnect Voice Command system allows i VR you to control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player SD Card USB iPod and Sirius Travel Link Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local applicable laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Command system as calmly and normally as possible The ability
217. e brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the brake system warning light is on Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one system will not affect the other system The manual transmission clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See your local authorized dealer for service N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543 Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re WARNING Continued fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main e To avoid contamination from foreign matte
218. e center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on several factors including the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee Air Bag Inflator Units The Supplemental Knee Air Bag units are located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column and below the glove compartment When the ORC detects a collision requiring the air bag it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Knee Air Bags The Supplemental Knee Air Bag deploys down and around the knee blocker glove box surface allowing the air bags to
219. e is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen An example of this message type is Automatic High Beams On NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position or cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position if equipped with Keyless Enter
220. e kit F Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement 1 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 clear in color N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 505 2 Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle 3 Press the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly 4 Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous ing 5 Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 in the housing so that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing Press the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place 6 Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its storage area located on the bottom of the air pump 7 Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the vehicle JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volt
221. e power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty CONES N SUM Instrument Panel Outlet UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 There is also a 12 volt power outlet located in the center console This power outlet has power available only when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position mm 072765514 Underhood Fuses Power Outlet Fuses 1 F84 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter 2 F30 Fuse 20 A Yellow Center Console Outlet Center Console Outlet 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in
222. e seatback it can be folded forward WARNING e Becertain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint Folded Rear Seatback system When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap 030964927 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety Two latches must be released to open the hood catch to the left The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel 060635505 Hood Safety Latch Hood Release Lever 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 Lift upward on the hood prop rod to release from 4 Place the hood prop rod in hood slot to secure the stowage retainer hood in the open position 031365523 031365522 Hood Prop Rod Hood Pr
223. e set for up to 3 stations in AM FM and This allows a total of 15 AM 15 FM and 15 SAT stations to be stored into pushbutton memory Player Button Pressing the Player button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Player mode CD USB iPOD AUX Bluetooth Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON RUN and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels T
224. ea axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision Trunk Mat If Equipped A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area The trunk mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from mud snow and debris Cargo Tie Downs UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 Ski Pass Through REAR WINDOW FEATURES There is a ski pass through door located behind the rear seat armrest that allows longer items such as snow skis to be stored in the rear cargo area Lower the armrest and pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass through door Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes For an additional 15 minutes of operation press the button a second time 030964928 ccm Ski Pass Through 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of t
225. ecause the transmission will not allow shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE while the wheels are turning 510 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be transmission or clutch overheating and failure AI tween DRIVE automatic transmission or 1st Gear low the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEU manual transmission and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drive train damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no if equipped or Traction Control System TCS if transmission shifting occurring equipped before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further information TRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission or clutch failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NN WHATTODOI NEMERGENCIES 511 WARNING 3 Remove the rubber storage tray liner from the center console then lift up the front of the shift lever PRNDL Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener bezel carefully disengage the bezel f
226. eceived including interference that may cause undesired operation e You can replace 4 with any message number shown on the screen 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M VOICE COMMAND Uconnect 200 Voice Command System Operation This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local applicable laws All attention should be focused on the safe operation of the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command amp vR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command vr button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become hel
227. ectronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h
228. ed NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 6 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 7 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi wer tion If the engine coolant temperature is too high this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information
229. ed by a small pas senger including a child or e The front passenger seat is occupied by a rearward facing infant seat or e The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time Front Passenger Seat Front Passenger Air Occupant Status Bag Classification Rearward facing infant seat Reduced power deploy ment Child including a child in a Full power deployment forward facing child re OR reduced power de straint or booster seat ployment Full power deployment OR reduced power de ployment Unoccupied seat Reduced power deploy ment Properly seated adult NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult allowing a full power front passenger air bag deploy ment Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system including a rearward facing infant seat in the front passenger seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear ward facing infant seat Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint The OCM works with the OCS sensor to determine the front passenger seat occupant s most probable classifica tion The OCS
230. ed warning message is present this icon is displayed in the lower left side of the Tire Pressure menu This feature shows the number of stored warning messages Pressing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are l mu Settings EVIC Units And Language Selection Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature Average and Current Fuel Economy Distance to Empty and Tire Pressure features Press and Release the RIGHT arrow button to toggle units between U S and MET RIC Press the UP arrow button until the Language is dis played then press the Right arrow button to select English Francais or Espanol depending on availability NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 Four Button EVIC If Equipped The system allows the driver to select information by This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering information by pressing the switches mounted on the wheel steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e Radio Info e Fuel Economy Info e Screen Setup e Digital Vehicle Speed e Analog Vehicle Speed e Trip Info e Tire Pressure 040963939 e Vehicle Info EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons Four Button EVIC Controls e Stored Warning Messages 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M UP Arrow Button Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll upward through the main menu and
231. edial e Press the Se button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cancellation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the Se button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands wi
232. eep against the door side windows or area where the SABIC or SAB air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back use the seat belts properly and use the appropriate sized child restraint infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their body outside of the window NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 WARNING e Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re main free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags the perfor mance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Knee Impact Bolster The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the front passenger and position the front occupant for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee Air Bags The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced protection and work together with the Advanced Front Air Bags during a frontal impact Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the Supplemental Knee Air Bags to
233. efer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Active Head Restraints AHR In the event of a rear impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head and the AHR The AHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact If the AHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR V
234. elative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h Side Monitoring 030405535 Rear Monitoring NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed of less than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light will not illuminate Overtaking Passing Overtaking Approaching 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in berms etc However occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Opposing Traffic 030405239 Stationary Objects NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 WARNING The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do
235. elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Continued 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Uconnect 8 4 Climate Controls If Equipped Soft Keys Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect 8 4 system GE v FM 91 AIO ET Hard Keys The hard keys are located below the Uconnect 8 4 screen in the center of the instrument panel screen as gt Vs he A 044435866 Uconnect 8 4 Automatic Temperature Controls Soft Keys d 2 Automatic Climate Controls Hard keys ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367 Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 1 A C Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function will cause the automatic opera tion to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator will turn off 2 Recirculation Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation The speeds can be selected using either hard keys or soft keys as follows NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is
236. elt Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ieee WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also rec
237. em Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH WARNING Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower An chors and Tether for CHildren LATCH All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder b
238. emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPARS fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 577 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safet
239. ent uus cot atures Ve io re os 557 Fl Brake system PP ARE eee Rosas 542 misil P 557 H Automatic Transmission If Equipped 544 H Backup Lamps edo usw env EG Re RAAR 558 o Manual Transmission If Equipped 546 E Ldoense Lamps 23 ad od AR EE neue D39 D Appearance Care And Protection From Nu Fluid Capacities 2 05445 26434854454 RR 560 OO be PEPER ED DE PER ees as B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 561 DID TP 552 EO N 561 H Interior USES sies qp shui pry te Rn 902 RE EE EN 562 O Underhogd Fuses 5223 ALLE PERE KS 593 Mi Vehicle Storage saseta ss ker tisi Cins 556 N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L TURBO 9 OE 9 y 8 o o 074863844 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Power Distribution Center 2 Engine Oil Level Indicator 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Fill 7 Battery 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Air Cleaner Filter 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 0L o 2 3 O aieo 7 T y lo ee E 0 ops B 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Engine Oil Fill 6 Battery 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Level Indicator 4 Integrated Power Module Fuses 8 Air Cleaner Filter MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L 5 070364451 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Engine O
240. ention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Ad vanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buck led up in the rear seat Never allow child
241. er Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 576 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or
242. er to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the low or high position e The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms It will not operate under the following conditions Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32 F 0 C unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside temperature rises above freezing Neutral Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position the transmission shift lever is in the NEU TRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steer
243. erial BOS USD 6440 8 4 os Ron 979 9209 P oe REOR S PDC Zeus yi exa RO 4 EE HE ll CD Player If Equipped OCD Player Operating Instructions 346 349 349 349 350 350 350 35l B iPod USB MP3 Control With Uconnect Voice Command If Equipped 352 H Connecting The iPod Or External USB I on saans RR ty Ge eae cass gos 352 EUsing This Feature san EES dcos 354 O Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons 354 E Play Mode oos ce RAP HAS DE Fan iol dtd 354 El ist Or Browse Mode sies see ER 355 O Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA 907 W Steering Wheel Audio Controls 358 O Radio Opod ON 446 244 4513 eanes CE ELE SH 399 DEP TAK OE EO enne ore as 359 B CD DVD Disc Maintenance 360 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 360 W Climate Controls oes3ams suec ir oe VES PA 361 O Manual Heating And Air Conditioning If oeiee t scis 4 ode deed peo Vobu duod gute d 361 O Uconnect 8 4 Climate Controls If POUIDDCG ty bowen ae eee RED EE Ha 366 O Climate Control Functions 371 O Automatic Temperature Control ATC 372 OOperating Tips ssersrereisrer hebi ieii 373 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Demister 2 Outlet 3 Instrument Cluster 4 Radio Uconnect System 5 Glove Compartment
244. ering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat 3 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel AU GANCFI Electronic Speed Control Switches 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose con
245. ers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Settings 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity The rain sense wipers will automatically change between an intermittent wipe slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of moisture that is sensed on the windshield Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System ref
246. es Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid 1 4 in 6 mm or larger injecting sealant into them The TIREFIT Sealant is If the tire has any sidewall damage only intended to seal punctures less than in 6 mm If the tire has any damage from driving with diameter in the tread of your vehicle extremely low tire pressure e Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses Fi the tire has any damage from driving on a flat If the wheel has any damage Continued N WHATTODOI NEMERGENCIES 499 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the e Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to wheel come in contact with hair eyes or clothing TIRE e Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat FIT is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed source A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Continued through the skin It causes skin eye and respira tory irritation Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is
247. es and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
248. esult in per 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex into PARK manual transmission in NEUTRAL and turn plosion the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 508 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negat
249. et all emis sion regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso line having an octane rating of 87 For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of 91 octane or higher is recommended 2 0L And 2 4L Engine This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800dfabe line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ETHOD R M 2 M RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING R M 2 METHOD 458 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications i
250. etween the inflating front and side of the seat s back trim cover front seats or Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in between the top and side seat s cushion trim cover rear any way seat Each air bag deploys independently a left side TEE impact deploys the left air bags only and a right side impact deploys the right air bags only 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e Being too close to the side air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that require air bag occupant protection SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Occupants including children who are up against or very close to SABIC or SAB air bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants especially children should not lean on or sl
251. evel while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Starting Voice Recognition VR Session in Radio Player Modes In this mode you can say the following commands NOTE The commands can be said on any screen when a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice Command EVR button Disc To switch to the disc mode say Change source to Disc This command can be given in any mode or screen e Track to change the track 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Voice Tree Uconnect Voice Command AM FM Satellite Radio available commands These commands can be spoken when the AM FM or Satellite radio is playing VR after pushing the Uconnect voice command buttc Ce on the steering wheel Commands only available Commands available in Commands only available in AM FM mode AM FM Satellite mode in Satellite mode Audio will Audio will Audio will Audio will Audio will change to 950 change to the change to the change to change to AM AM or FM next Satellite satellite station Satellite frequency or Rock Station 80 s on 8 Channel 8 Satellite Channel stored in preset 5 030770608 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 NOTE 1 You can replace 950 AM with any other AM or FM frequency such as 98 7 FM 2 You can replace 80 s on 8 with any other satellite station name re
252. evice can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if supported by the specific audio device Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod9 USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either press the AUX button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod9 USB MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data e Use the TUNE SCROLL control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or press the VR button and say Next Track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say Previous Track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the RW button
253. f the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compart ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close 033365527 Sunglass Bin Door GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery 3 The HomeLink buttons located on either the overhead console headliner or sunvisor designate the three differ ent HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 034033576 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor Headliner NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON R
254. f they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 459 CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle
255. faces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e f you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well e f you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider d t hields behind each wheel e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges mui n EE Re of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on open scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and doppe Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly hor with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting e To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use with a clean dry towel MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel CAUTION e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp
256. faction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 4 4 a WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB WER INTERMITTENT EA Up we GLOW PLUG C MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGH POWER WiNOSHIFLDWIPER SIDE AIRBAG WABHER GM PPE S Heart ee amp 0 cnsee 9 Kms a STEERING FLUD AND SRS X pa AIRBAG AM Er TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER Ol TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAC OFF D ee D e so i LOWER ANCHORS SUDING DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER AND TETHER FOR UCONNECT RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DOOR AJAR CONVERTIOLE HORN SEE OWNERS TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL 30 INTRODUCTION 5 FLECTRONK PROGRAM DRAKE n CONTRO ASSIST BRAKE gt D BRAKE SYSTEM HILL DESCENT WARMING PARKING CONTROL wor ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTHOCK DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM 4WD BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING ORNE BRAKE TOW HAUL WARNING TOW AU 4 LOW eve AJC PUSH OFF Am ELECTRON
257. g the child restraint Second Row AIR ALR AR e N A Not pase e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Installing Child Restraint Tether Strap 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system 1 Cover A Tether Strap Hook will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and 2 Atactung Strap See pull it tight if necessary 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tet
258. ge will turn off once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Service TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime and display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM mes sage for a minimum of 5 seconds If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings eee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limi
259. gh beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll Mirrors O Inside Day Night Mirror o Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped D Outside Mirrors D Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped O Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach Lighting If Equipped O Power Mirrors o Heated Mirrors If Equipped O Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped ll Blind Spot Monitoring If Equipped E Rear Cross Path 2929242 eR o Modes Of Operation ll Uconnect Phone Uconnect 200 O Operation o Phone Call Features O Uconnect Phone Features H Advanced Phone Connectivity 4109 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M H Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone O General Information Bl Uconnect Phone 8 4 8 4N 145 B Uconnect 8 4 8 4 NAV llle 145 EIQJOCIAUON eeri 444445 CR RSS OUS CERT E 148 O Phone Call Features 4 160 DO Uconnect Phone Features 164 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 169 H Things You Sh
260. gth and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the
261. h enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owners Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 1 Press the Phone soft key on the screen to begin 2 If there is no phone currently connected with the system a pop up will appear 68 4 FEM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out No phone connected Would you like to pair a phone y l D DPA MH x ay Radio Player Controls Climate Phone Mure 3 Select Yes to begin the pairing process Then search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen e If No is selected touch the Settings soft key from the Uconnect Phone main screen e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen e See Step 4 to complete the process 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting 68 44 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Bluetooth Pairing We 72 Bluetooth Connection in progress
262. h wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach Lighting If Equipped Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal and puddle lamp contain 3 LEDs Two of the LED s are used as turn signal indicators which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs The third LED supplies illuminated entry lighting which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open any door This LED shines downward to illuminate the ground adjacent to the Front and Rear Doors The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30 seconds or it will fade to off
263. he Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instrument panel 3 Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage location Quickly proceed to D Drive Vehicle N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 503 WARNING TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using CAUTION e The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get hot after use so it should be handled carefully Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end TIREFIT Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h until the tire is repaired or replaced Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant con tacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s inte rior It can also result in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma nent damage to the kit E After Driving Pull over to a safe location Refer to Whenever You Stop D Drive Vehicle to Use TIREFIT before continuing 6 Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire 4 Tam the Mode Select Knob 5 to the Air Mode drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h 2 Uncoil the power pl
264. he rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS B instrument Panel Features B Instrument Cluster Base Bl Instrument Cluster Premium Analog Bl Instrument Cluster Premium Digital W Instrument Cluster Descriptions Bl Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC O Engine Oil Change Indicator System o Two Button EVIC If Equipped O Four Button EVIC If Equipped 280 281 282 283 284 297 299 300 ll Uconnect Settings Bl larded P gs DOM CVs EE REED oo eyes ack dia D Customer Programmable Features Uconnect System 8 4 Settings N Uconnect 200 AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Siriusxm 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play O Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files O Enter Browse Button CD Mode For MP3 WMA Play G Info Button CD Mode For MP3 WMA Play O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode D Operation Instructions Universal S
265. he transmis sion becomes extremely hot the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down During very cold temperatures 4 F 20 C or below transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed Normal operation will resume once the transmis sion temperature has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the engine OFF i 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation 406 STARTING AND OPERATING xe NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you vi
266. he transmission oil is suffi ciently warm 396 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Instrument Cluster Messages Messages will be displayed in the instrument cluster to alert the driver when certain unusual conditions occur These messages are described below MESSAGE DESCRIPTION GEAR NOT AVAILABLE In AutoStick mode the gear selected by the driver is not available due to a fault condition See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service SHIFT NOT ALLOWED The gear position requested by the driver is currently blocked This occurs if NEUTRAL is requested while moving with the throttle opened if REVERSE is requested while moving at 6 mph 10 km h or faster if DRIVE is re quested while moving backwards at 6 mph 10 km h or faster or if 3rd gear or higher is requested at a stop Make sure the vehicle is stopped before engaging DRIVE or RE VERSE SHIFT TO NEUTRAL THEN D or R The transmission has shifted itself into NEUTRAL due to a fault condition or overheat due to excessive idling when stopped in DRIVE with the brakes released but the shift ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 MESSAGE DESCRIPTION AUTOSTICK NOT AVAILABLE AUTOMATIC MODE NOT AVAILABLE REDUCE GEAR CHANGES TRANS GETTING HOT PRESS BRAKE lever remains in gear Shift into NEUTRAL and then back into gear for continued driving If the transmission will not e see your authorized dealer AutoStick mode is unavailable due to a shift lever fault
267. heck your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehi
268. her strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 CAUTION ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to M
269. hese labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism Uconnect 200 is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded EJECT Button Ejecting A CD A Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF ru SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 WMA modes 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner Shuffle SHFL And Repeat RPT This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the MENU button to display the Player menu Use the TUNE SCROLL knob to scroll to the Shuffle or
270. hicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here WARNING are some of the most common solutions e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door to complete the training for a Rolling Code opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes e Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ten e Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these If you have any problems or require assistance please safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor www HomeLink com for information or assistance mation or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon mo
271. hicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system 456 STARTING AND OPERATING ee fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire The Inflate Tire to XX message and the graphic with the low tire pressure flashing or in a different color will be displayed 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tir
272. hicle over steer The system uses engine torque reduction along with individual wheel brake pressure to correct under steer and over steer conditions e Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESC Off Indicator Light The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is off In some cases when accelerating from stop on steep grades it may be beneficial to turn off ESC Once the grade ascent is complete ESC can be turned on again 424 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING e The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent collisions The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator 5 Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine ru
273. his mode you may say the following commands Track to change the track Next Track to play the next track e Previous Track to play the previous track e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the Voice Command vr button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the Voice Command amp VR button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos Setup To switch to system setup you may say on of the following e Change to setup 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Switch to system setup e Change to setup e Main menu setup or e Switch to setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voic
274. icator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remain ing steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has suc cessfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained 4 Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed
275. icle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone Uconnect Phone supports the following features Voice Activated Features e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smiths Mo bile or Dial 248 555 1212 e Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming 3 SMS messages e Hands Free text messaging Send a message to John Smiths Mobile e Redialing last dialed numbers Redial e Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back e View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recent Calls 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Smith Mobile Screen Activated Features e Dialing via Keypad using touch screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touch screen e Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs e Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS e Sending a text message via the touch screen e Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen e Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly NOTE Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly Your mobile phone s audio
276. icle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Overloading The load carrying components springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier suspension compo nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 467 TRAILER TOWING In this section y
277. il Fill 6 Battery 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Level Indicator 4 Integrated Power Module Fuses 8 Air Cleaner Filter 520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is po
278. ild RESTANT oes eed cod ea 83 84 85 90 jd AM PD 59 TOME Sed a5 dae amp oo a RA OE du P doner 50 51 OOO Pm 95 Operating Instructions suis ss Ve ee oases al ielensioieis 2529 92 193 93 22 4 3 5 9 x yd 58 Rear Cdl PP 50 Untwistine Procedure 24244264 RR ERR 05 c r 197 AUSE oo teh ease READ ARE 197 200 Head JSeetrauils ss oer SEE 46 HER ARE 205 596 INDEX aaa id Heed as suce 9 yr REIS eens oes ees 202 Reat FOJN exc 2054 PROP SR HR ER BE 207 Seatback Release 00 201 207 ibl Pr 201 Security Alarm Theft Alarm ses 9h au 21 Selection of MC P 525 Sentry Key Immobilizer ss EER ge anes 19 oeniry Key Programming sacs ene Ghee hee pars 20 oetitry Key Replacement wavaes guuceaives rasi 20 Service Assistance ee eee 573 Servie CONTAC 4 uae seus Sas ono neds Veg 575 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator ES SS 294 Service Manuals uada m4 330 Y dE dew 3 DT Dettine Hie Clock ss ROS EUR DRR ees 4 340 Shift Lever Override 4 us 6 034 445 KERE KERE N 511 Shifting Manual Transmission 384 Short Message Service SMS ado ere ges 139 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 45299 02993 55 Shoulder Belts go eter e CR RES 50 ide LAE ose psa ANASO OPEDAG E Hu yi Side View Mirror Adjustment 106 DIerials THEE oe ek taped a H4 ba a Soe 97 216 286 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 408 SmartBeam
279. ill turn off in the normal manner NOTE e The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature e The headlight delay time is programmable using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is replaced the omartBeam M mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer To Activate 1 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position 2 Push the multifunction lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph 32 km h 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee To Deactivate 1 Pull the multifunction lever toward you or rearward in car to manually deactivate the system normal opera tion of low beams 2 Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system NOTE e SmartBeam can be turned on or off using the Uc
280. ill display selectable informa tion such as compass outside temperature etc For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC If Equipped 29 Electronic Speed Control Indicator This telltale will illuminate amber when the G electronic speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Con trol in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle This telltale will illuminate green when the O electronic speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Con trol in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 30 Amber Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Reconfigurable Telltales This area will show reconfigurable amber telltales Low Fuel Telltale Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 31 Red Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Reconfigurable Telltales This area will show reconfigurable red telltales Door s Ajar Oil Pressure Warning Telltale Charging System Telltale Electronic Throttle Control ETC Telltale Engine Temperature Warning Telltale Electric Power Steering Malfunction For further information refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 32 ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO indicator wil
281. ill remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from
282. imited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity 442 STARTING AND OPERATING See WARNING Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuous
283. immediately once the ignition is placed into the RUN position NOTE The approach lighting will not function when the shift lever is moved out of the PARK position 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the drivers door trim panel 030464425 tt Power Mirror Control The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press either the L left or R right button to select the mirror that you want to adjust Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light will turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light 030436290 Illuminated Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped This feature allows for additional flexibility in position ing the visor to block out the sun
284. indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Se button until you hear a single beep 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VR button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the eo button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the button until you hear a single beep R
285. ing column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column SDN 031764308 n E MAOO Tilt Telescoping Control Handle N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 To unlock the steering column pull the control handle down To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle up until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System 226 UNDERSTANDING
286. ing the pull strap where it can be raised on a lift Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Opening The Access Panel 486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3 Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire WARNING e A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided e Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Preparations For Jacking A 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas Jack and Spare Tire Fastener 4 Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly 5 Remove the spare tire N WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 487 WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking And Changing A Tire WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to vehicle c
287. int in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freez Ing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 OAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the coolant bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions 542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNINCG Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possibl
288. inued Continued fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle 414 STARTING AND OPERATING See WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately POWER STEERING The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually WARNING Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible If the Steering icon is flashing it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance ee STARTING AND OPERATING 415
289. ion refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open and the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer Please see your authorized dealer for service Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 Any door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door To change the
290. is a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges 558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Backup Lamps 3 Twist the bulb socket one quarter turn counter clock wise to remove 1 Open trunk se to remove 2 Remove trim cover i 073365516 4 Replace bulb MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 073365517 5 Twist the bulb socket one quarter turn clockwise to install 6 Install trim cover i 1 License Lamp Bulb License Lamp 2 Socket 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly fascia iuo 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly the screws 560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES 13 2 Gallons 4 Quarts 3 8 Liters 2 0L Engine SAE 0W 20 API Certified 5 Quarts 4 7 Liters 2 4L Engine SAE 0W 20 API Certified 5 5 Quarts 5 2 Liters Cooling System 1 4L Turbo Engine MOPAR OAT Antifreeze Engine Coolant 7 2 Quarts 6 8 Liters 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 2 0L and 2 4L Engine MOPAR OAT Antifreeze Engine 7 2 Quarts 6 8 Liters Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUIN
291. is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest phone paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio e Show Paired Phones or e Connect My Phone Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device e Touch the Player soft key to begin e Change the Source to Bluetooth e Touch the Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Add Device soft key NOTE If there is no device currently connected with the system a pop up will appear e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled audio device When prompted on the device enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE For devices which are not made a favorite the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired Audio Devices Connecting To A Particular
292. is tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 430 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for high MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 4
293. ition in OFF position 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Remote Start Aborted Door Open e Remote Start Aborted Hood Open e Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset e Remote Start Aborted Too Cold e Remote Start Aborted Time Expired The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter Howeve
294. itored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode some gears will be unavailable The transmission will operate only in a certain select set of gears such as 1st 2nd 3rd and Reverse or Ist 3rd 5th and Reverse or 2nd 4th and 6th with no Reverse PARK and NEUTRAL will continue to be available The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Turn the engine OFF 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Six Speed Automatic Transmission 2 0L And 2 4L Engine Only 6F24 The shift lever position display located i
295. ive jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 509 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your manual transmission vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE automatic transmission or 1st Gear manual transmission and REVERSE Using mini mal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective NOTE Automatic transmission vehicles cannot be rocked in this manner b
296. ke 2 13 x a Vue RS ERA SOR EP 530 Reminder Lichts OU seras dieses desee eg a roseo g 214 Reminder Seat Belt SS 58 Remote Control Didi Wie tend oes adoro ev v EPI PER ERA 28 Remote Keyless Entry RKE is see RR Rma 24 N INDEX 595 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 358 Remote Storie System uiuere d p on do ER bee Hd 28 Remote Tank Release 4 4 62200 Ces ensure s Nd 45 Replacement BUDS ssa ee pobre e c 056 Replacement ke Suis aeu fuk dase bp 39 09 48003 20 Replacement Pats uacua son ees HE OER Ka its 522 Replacement MGS sos 6 ban s d PER EROR CR AE 444 Reporting Safety Delects oos si Ee reri Pd e 576 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 293 Restraint Head eee 205 Restraints Child 2 uds sou 5a BREED eRe Seo 83 Restraints QcCUpant uoa tas SKREE den ea d 47 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck sees mex iut tr 509 Rotation HEES eek dou EURO ROO Een 448 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 95 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 97 Safety Defects Reporting sa x 9E EER 576 palety Information He uu eodem deck ritini 427 Dale TIUS ceu ERTS EIE EE 94 Safety Exhaust GaS iae 64 4054 Ronee eda a Ks 94 Schedule Maintenance leen 564 Seat Belt Maintenance llle 552 Scat DET REMINdET assa sopa e Sua kc RI HE 58 Seat Belts x25 4909 hae oho ee OE AN 47 50 95 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 55 And Pregnant Women sess 59 Ch
297. ke System aes ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 26 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of I an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the Key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 CAUTION 27 Transmission Temperature Warning Ligh
298. l illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy The ECO display will toggle on and off depending on driving habits and vehicle usage ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 0 041064390 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC EVIC Steering Wheel Controls 2 EVIC Display 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NEE The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure e Unstored Messages This message typ
299. l in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your 440 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M
300. l to choose from several patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the control or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode e Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix tipe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Front Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature set
301. lant Hose 6 onto the valve stem 5 Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire NN VV HAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501 C Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Tire e Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE FIT kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL e After pressing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn Off the TIREFIT kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode Press the Power Button 4 to turn On the TIREFIT kit 2 Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if avail able Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the TIREFIT kit 3 The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance 502 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M NOTE If the Mode Select Kno
302. lay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Compass Settings After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map e Perform Compass Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON s
303. leaning Wheels NC E EE T T TT TT hs a Ae hd 549 Climate Control Lax u s Ene da DAE es 361 giu AA EE N N SEE SE FO 340 EIER 4c eae thee oc AAR OR EE EN 542 Se Fluid s ues uso SA EU eK Hae oe aes 542 Com Holder os enc 4 2999324 525224959 wi 268 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 360 Compact Disc CD Player a vare dues Guus ears a 350 Compact opare Tire ees sec oH Gee ea es 440 Computer Imp Tavel a aciem PU rip eni Cies 303 Connector WEL oe Pee eee oo HOOR Fi ee ee 902 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 352 Conserving FUEL a Eade aa a RAS a A E S 320 Console PloOf ii kde rura PNE SERES 268 Console Overhead i 2s 644 EER Ek ER 248 Contract Service xad s proh X bi X9 TRI S ES 575 Coolant Antifreeze aaa 560 561 a EEELLLLLIIIIGGGIIIIIULIUULISIILIILILLELTILAUULILCCZLHLEA OLLULGGGLGIAUG qU iL nHo lzA LAI LL INDEX 585 Cooling System Adding Coolant Antifreeze Coolant Level 538 Disposal of Used Coolant 540 Drain Flush and Refill 537 Ie DECHOBE oues we EP deo ERROR BEDR d d RE E 540 Points to Remember 5522222229 s 539 541 iese oio rr 539 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 537 Corrosion Protection lle 546 Seile RM 265 Customer Assistance leen 573 Data Recorder Event Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 220 Daytime Running Lights ya RR 4645028 os 214 Dealer Service sd sie DRR he REGERE X x
304. ll be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and is usable across all languages 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Emergency Assistance NOTE If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is e The emergency number dialed is based on the country reachable where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada 080 for Mexico The number dialed may not be e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency applicable with the available mobile service and area number for your area e f supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Emergency If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows OIE e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your e Press the es button to begin chances of successfully making a phone call as com e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say pared to using the mobile phone directly Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num Ass SE ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer Mexico gency your mobile phone must be e turned on e paired to the U
305. llision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Seat Belt Pretensioner The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert w
306. lly latched pas senger seat cushion may result in misclassification of the front passenger s weight This may result in serious injury or death in a collision Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for the specific model being repaired Always use the correct seat cover and cushion specified for the ve hicle Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an aftermarket seat cover or cushion Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the passenger seat assembly its related components seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal collision This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS and or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards CMVSS Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in th
307. lose to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher e Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher help prevent personal injury or damage to your l hicle 3 Set the parking brake EE Be e Always park on a firm level surface as far from 4 Place the shift lever into PARK the edge of the roadway as possible before raising 5 Turn OFF the ignition 6 Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack Ing pon Hot example if changing Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic the right front tire block the left rear transmission in PARK a manual transmission in wine REVERSE 060505162 Continued 488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued CAUTION Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 060564409 Jack Warning Label Jacking Locations N WHATTODOI NEMERGENC
308. ls contain storage areas TN Rear Door Trim Storage 035265528 L n Front Door Trim Storage 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Passenger Seat Storage If Equipped Some models may be equipped with storage under the front passenger seat cushion Pull upward on the seat tether to open the storage compartment 035265530 Passenger Seat Cushion Tether Passenger Seat Cushion Storage Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 Rear Seat Armrest Storage If Equipped CARGO AREA FEATURES For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the armrest Lift upward on the latch to open the storage compartment Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped with 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling the seatback loops between the seatbacks and the bolsters 3 When the seats are folded down they provide a continu ous nearly flat extension of the load floor NOTE These loops can be tucked away when not in use 035237396 Rear Armrest Storage 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Seatback Loops After releasing the seatback it can be folded forward 030964927 Folded Rear Seatback When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap NN UNDERSTANDI
309. lso on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds programmable when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 To activate the delay feature place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off If you turn the headlights or parking lights on or place the ignition in ACC or RUN the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they w
310. lters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended 528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Maintenance Free Battery WARNING Continued Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep tenance required flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with WARNING an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can clamps to touch each other burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling e The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529 CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post
311. ly when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced STARTING AND OPERATING 443 Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to 055007576 1 Worn Tire follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure 2 New lire You could lose control and have a collision resulting These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread in serious injury or death grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline 444 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be
312. ly with you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion clear water resistance built into your vehicle n d e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu What Causes Corrosion lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove paint and protective coatings from your vehicle e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR The most common causes of corrosion are Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect s Doa cale ditanda mo sre accumulation your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing 1 that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint e Insects tree sap and tar finish e Stone and gravel impact Salt in the air near sea coast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants 548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e f you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials considered the responsibility of the owner such as steel wool or scouring powder which will e f your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner scratch metal and painted sur
313. m regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position from the OFF position 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bott
314. maximized under cents the system may not always work for some e When navigating through an automated system such 2 EO DIE SEHR as voice mail or when sending a page before speaking e low to medium vehicle speed the digit stri k t Send j e digit string make sure to say Sen e low road noise e Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the PEE A E vehicle is not in motion is recommended fully cl i e Phonebook Mobile and Favorites name recognition S OSE AE rate is optimized when the entries are not similar e dry weather conditions and e You can say O letter O for 0 zero e operation from the driver s seat NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness NOTE Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when to a large degree rely on the phone and network and the vehicle is not in moving not the Uconnect Phone 68 24 tt FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by iini dek td lowering the in vehicle audio volume ER 14 James Butler Listen f 13 248 576 5459 Listen e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be E 12 Beatrice Adams Listen compromised with the convertible top down m 11 Sanjiv Prabaker Listen Voice Text Reply fej 10 Lin Ford Listen Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on L 9 Jay Kay Listen your phone 7 peer in fist V
315. may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature e Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial ing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The amp vr button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking There are 2 numbers with the name John Say the full name you could press the EVR button and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length e Touch the More soft key then touch the Settings soft key 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to show your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempt ing to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal stren
316. mended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills In addition downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed Downshift progressively Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch STARTING AND OPERATING 385 WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid CAUTION When descending a hill be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause valve damage and or clutch disc damage even if the clutch pedal is pressed 386 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the CAUTION Failure to follow the maximum recommended down shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is pressed vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing on the brake pedal Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH KM H
317. mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 175 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Uconnect Hands Free Calling on the The commands can be spoken from any scraen after pushing the Uconnect Phone button Available commands while phone call is in progress steering wheel The commands can be spoken from any Screen while call is active aller pushing the Uconnect voice cornmmand bultori Call John Smith Show My Show My ilg t 2565 Incoming Contacts Mobile calls SES Number Last Last associated number incoming te on the steering wheel Dial 248 555 age Shows the phonebook Number is entry for John dialed Incoming Phonebook call list will screen will be shown be shown Dial Tones for Dial Tones numbers stored in for 1234 Voicemail are sent Password are sent wth entry is called is call is dialed redialed dialed Smith with all stored numbers 030863306 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 NOTE e You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone e You can replace John Smith with any name in your number supported by your Mobile phone mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will
318. mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e Setup to switch to system setup 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Radio AM e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In s meni Coico them ment this mode you may say the following commands Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite e Next Station to select the next station Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands e Frequency to change the frequency e Previous Station to select the previous station Channel i h he channel by i e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number u 1 h h 1 e Main Menu to switch to the main menu e Next Channel to select the next channel Radio FM P i To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In e Previous Channel to select the previous channel this mode you may say the following commands e List Channel to hear a list of available channels e Frequency to change the frequency e Select Name to say the name of a channel e Next Station to select the next station e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In t
319. move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Power Seat Switch Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 WARNING Continued e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if NT movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s Power Seat Recliner Switch path WARNING Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward the seatback will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also
320. mp mp P DODE 2013 ENSE OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obliga tion upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured Copyright 2012 Chrysler Group LLC n m O O Z R
321. must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The
322. must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 WARNING Continued e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the first flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear sur
323. n the Hazard Warning flashers When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e Youcan also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control 484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNINCG to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the
324. n the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive press the button on the front of the shift lever and move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers 400 STARTING AND OPERATING See Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and AutoStick shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further informa tion Moving the shift lever rearward or forward while in the AutoStick position beside the Drive posi tion will manually select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 6 5 4 3 2 1 Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any ge
325. nd a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 6 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for warmer temperature set tings EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369 NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 7 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 8 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 9 AUTO Operation Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 10 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 11 D
326. nded brake fluids or equivalent MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B Maintenance Schedule 564 O Maintenance Chart len O Required Maintenance 564 COmmrecomzroon mo2zr2Z2zmHa2 re M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 564 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Change Oil message is displayed Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever comes first Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip e Check engine oil level e Check windshield washer fluid level e Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and b
327. ne to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect Phone NOTE e The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the Roadside Assistance touch screen If you need roadside assistance e The emergency number dialed is based on the country e Press the Xe button to begin where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Roadside Assistance 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e The roadside assistance call may also be initiated by touch e The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Roadside Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Roadside Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your
328. ng the size designation Ex standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded ample T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or S Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load th
329. nimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Key Fob with Remote x2 Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon EE E oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Doors closed bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious s Hood aoci injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e Trunk closed away from children Operation of the Remote Start e HAZARD switch off System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Dattery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pressed e System not disabled from previous remote start event e Vehicle theft alarm not active e Ign
330. nning The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will flash to indicate the system is actively correcting an undesir able vehicle condition This includes Yaw control traction control and trailer sway control If the lamp remains solid under normal driving conditions your vehicle should be serviced at an authorized dealer The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the Traction Control System TCS or trailer sway is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system may make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC
331. noxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the device Power Sunroof Switch e The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 3 Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will
332. ns This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition OFF Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature e The Ignition Off time is programmable using the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS IF EQUIPPED NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPARS cigar The 12 Volt 13 Amp instrument panel power outlet is knob and element must be used located on the lower instrument panel below the climate controls The power outlet has power available when the ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position Th
333. nt Fuel Transit Lodging Shopping Bank Entertain ment Recreation Attractions Community Auto Services Hospitals Parking Airport Po lice Stations Fire Stations or Auto Dealers SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Power Seats If Equipped Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward Some models may be equipped with a power driver s The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward seat The power seat switch is located on the outboard Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will side of the seat near the floor Use the switch to move the move in the direction of the switch Release the switch seat up down forward rearward or to tilt the seat when the desired position has been reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will
334. nt passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle NOTE The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the doors are locked using the door panel switch a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the vehicle and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected outside the vehicle The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following
335. o Empty A e Fuel Economy Info e Cruise Control Info p e Stored Messages 041064739 e Tire Pressure ENE TEN EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons Two Button EVIC e Settings Controls e Units e Language NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 UP Arrow Button e Key In Ignition Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll upward through the main menus Odometer Digital Vehicle Speed Trip Info Range To e Right Turn Signal Out Empty Average Fuel Economy Current Fuel Economy Stored Messages Settings ui En RIGHT Arrow Button e Lights On Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to Low Beam Headlight Out access the sub menu screens of a main menu gt item Press and hold the RIGHT arrow button e High Beam Headlight Out for two seconds to reset displayed selected e License Plate Light Out features that can be reset e eft Turn Signal Out Backup Light Out Brake Light Out e Parking Light Out Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Messages e Key Fob Battery Low e Wrong Key Fob Service Airbag System e Key Fob Damaged Service Airbag Warning Light 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Washer Fluid Low Parking Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low Service Electronic Braking System Engine Temperature Hot Battery Voltage Low Oil Pressure Low Fuel Low Service Antilock Brake System Service Electronic Throttle Control Transmission Too Hot Service Power Steering Oil Temperature Hot
336. obile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone System follow the instructions de scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 e When prompted say List Phones e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest lowest priority To Select or Delete a paired phone priority phone present in or near approximately being announced press the vr button and say a eee Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones 3 an alternate way to Select or Delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the e Press the Se button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the follo
337. oft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e BalancelFade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Music Info Cleanup This feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation To make your selection touch the Music Info Cleanup soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection touch the Surround Sound soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Phone Bluetooth After pressing
338. om position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters Key Fob With RKE Transmitter 021307469 021341332 Keyless Enter N Go Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Lights With Lock This feature will
339. omated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the VR button and say the seguence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if reguired to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VR button and say 3 7 4 6 tt Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the vr button and say Send The system will prompt you to say the number If you wish to send the name say Send Name followed by a valid name from the phonebook Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not all
340. ommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re The restraint must be appropriate for your child s straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy weight and height Check the label on the restraint for ing passenger air bag which may cause severe or weight and height limits fatal injury to the infant e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child re
341. on about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined
342. on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on co
343. oning filter Replace the engine air X X X X X cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 1 4L X X X X X Turbo Engine Replace the spark plugs 2 0L X and 2 4L Engine Inspect brake linings parking X X X X X X X brake function MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 567 Mileage Or Time Passed 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 70 000 80 000 90 000 100 000 110 000 120 000 130 000 140 000 150 000 ee Comes First SS 000 a 000 Ee 000 Ee 000 na 000 000 Ee 000 m 000 Ee 000 s 000 192 000 208 000 224 000 240 000 Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever comes first Change the transmission fluid X X X manual or automatic 1 4L turbo engine only if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 568 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Mileage Or Time Passed 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 70 000 80 000 90 000 Whichever Comes First a LX i le Change the automatic trans mission fluid and filter 2 0L 2 4L engines only if you fre quently drive on rough or un paved roads on mountain roads on short trips in heavy
344. onnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly Daytime Running Lights DRL The Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever the ignition is placed in the RUN position the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving NOTE The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 Fog Lights If Equipped O To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking The front fog light switch is built into the headlight lights or the low beam headlights and press the switch headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates m
345. onomy MPG Flower Analog Display 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NEE Id iPod a m 35 mpg 126 31 mpg 438 m m OK to Reg gt eMe 12567 miles Fuel Economy MPG Flower Digital Display Average Fuel Economy If Equipped This feature shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When Average Fuel Economy is selected The word RESET with right arrow appears next to it Pressing the RIGHT arrow button will reset Average Fuel Economy which displays 0 immediately after reset Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average read ing before the reset Range To Empty RTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level RTE cannot be reset through the RIGHT arrow button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the RTE displayed value When the RTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the RTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 FUEL mess
346. ons of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Continued 446 STARTING AND OPERATING See TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES CAUTION Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body clearance Follow these recommendations to guard To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the against damage following precautions e Traction device must be of proper size for the tire as Because of restricted traction device clearance be recommended by the traction device manufacturer tween tires and other suspension components it 1S important that only traction devices in good con e Install on Front Tires dition are used Broken devices can cause serious e Due to limited clearance a 225 45R17
347. onsole een 268 Exhaust System ous pee SR RE a guod Sar ded n 94534 Fluid Capacities is ske s Gas HERE SES va 560 Exterior Folding Mirrors io 63 as ek pe thee es IU Elaid Denke niis GR ELE ORE A RATS 97 Exterior gs AE ses urges qne VEL dex DER d pus 211 Fluid Level Checks EXCOHOP Lise oe 44 Keagan e i Hd 297 Automatic Transmission 545 Fluid Brake 3 2 3 oce n oe Pro venons 562 Filler Location Fuel uuu v ta RE HOD EUR GEE s 207 JUS Sho es OX EUR REESE Sew EA EA REPE 561 Filters Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 561 cur CACHE sai ER ie snes eee eee ees Oe dt EIE P193 2243 ees 215 288 Pur CONGIIONING ax ades ega eem de Wi ees 9 4590 Folding Rear Seal us diem deae een gone m 207 Automatic Transmission 5045 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle i sek ERR rey 509 POO ARE EE RE ERE P NS 527 96l Fu l EE EE ORE EN EE 7 359 457 561 ERGE ord epee TT EVA ou PE T p 217 POOMUVES 524 545 ARE ED RE eee Ge RES 460 Capacity 588 INDEX M Clea ERA ER AE READ ELE AE A58 COMSCIUING 243 959 65404 62s 44 RR DERS 920 PROMO PPP m 458 Filler Cap Gas Cap 3 xe acd qup ope 462 Filler Door Gas Cap 42 secu ata es dos d Ve 292 ern P Bnmn 457 fo PEDI 290 Lief Cr 292512 Matenas Added is soek DEE ROOS V cy A60 Me tiaiol Pr 458 Ooie quM EE 457 Reguirements ados xx ER Geer aaa casa os 457 Pavel Mode wenins sce gees oe He eee a 320 Talk Cady spea ores ded Geeta eee ea 560 FuclOPUIMIZED gicc
348. ook Name e Press the Se button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call John Doe Mobile e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe Call Controls The touch screen allows you to control the following call features e Answer e End e Ignore e Hold unhold e Mute unmute e Transfer the call to from the phone e Swap 2 active calls e Join 2 active calls together Touch Tone Number Entry e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the Dial soft key e The Touch Tone screen will be displayed e Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and touch Call To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the vr button while in a call and say Send 12344 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types 68 44 FM 91 7 We 72 X 54 vout 10 10 NW Ana Conda Axel Schweiss Buddy s Pizza 248 990 6543 James Buttler 35 D Dennett 7 items in list v 1 m ny OFF mj Radio Player Controle Clirnato Moro 030564876 e Incoming Calls e Outgoing Calls e Missed Calls e All Calls These can be accessed by touching the
349. op the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do nottry to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537 Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine
350. op Rod Slot N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 CAUTION LIGHTS Headlight Switch To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to xe The headlight switch is located on the left side of close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi X the instrument panel This switch controls the mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should operation of the headlights parking lights instru secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming inte Fa the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged rior lights and fog lights WARNINCG Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death Headlight Switch 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light operation Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is a
351. or If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Maintaining Your Air Bag System Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot WARNING protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well e Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 WARNING Continued Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to e Do not attempt to modify any
352. or mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury Continued Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 WARNING Continued e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and hi
353. or the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor syst
354. ormal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice within five seconds or by using the external release switch located on the underside of the decklid overhang The release fea ture will function only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition 81ac2fd7 Trunk Release Button With the ignition in the ON RUN position the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed With the ignition in the OFF position the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Trunk Emergency Release Before Starting Your Vehicle for more information on As a security measure a trunk internal emergency release trunk oper
355. ose control of your vehicle and have a collision Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to the brakes axle engine transmission steer ing suspension chassis structure or tires Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further Continued information When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings ee STARTING AND OPERATING 473 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued 2 GTW 3 GAWR e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized this requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic Towing Requirements Tires 5 transmission in PARK With a manual
356. oss cust DE tt ee ons 462 uL RM dd E ENCORE CIE ee res 462 Behind Motorhome Ete ce 179 W Vehicle Loading 464 o Towing This Vehicle Behind Another O Vehicle Certification Label 465 Vehicle ou uua quu eder de eee N OO 479 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not WARNING e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped ra Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake dangerous for a number of reasons A child or press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the shift others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil lever in NEUTRAL dren should be warned not to touch the parking NOTE DiE pri ope dal OP pie DE ever e The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is Continued pressed to the floor leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 380 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e If the key will not turn and
357. ot all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars SA located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are located just below the button with the anchorage symbol on the rear seat but are not visible You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback j s 602263666741 and seat cushion surfaces LATCH Anchorages ln addition there are tether strap anchorages Jj R7 behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next at
358. ou will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver
359. ou will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as Phone or caller ID Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup Device Pairing and then Pair a Device the following compound command can be said Setup Device Pairing and Pair a Bluetooth Device e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For 120 UNDERSTANDING THE
360. ould Know About Your Uconnect Phone aa dues o roe dese 169 O General Information 179 ll Voice Command Uconnect 200 180 O Voice Command System Operation 180 EMCOMMIANGS 34 44 546 EDE eet Gono 4 4553 181 Eie MANDE soe E Dok g oa oS ease ae oS 184 B Voice Command eee 185 DB Uconnect 8 4 8 4 NAV 0048 185 DO Uconnect Voice Commands 187 Hh ND CT 188 kh CMT ee RE OK 197 D Power Seats If Equipped 198 O Manual Front Seat Forward Rearward AdUStMENE nes BEER KERR RR GER oo 200 O Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment 201 3 Manual Seat Height Adjustment If EQUIPDCd Rm 202 D Heated Seats If Equipped 202 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 O Head Restraints 4 4 nea iere e re esga 205 O Multifunction Lever sit oe ELE RR RE ED 216 ET ol ide Rear ocat uu 23a ao 1 OR oe y DR d 207 EDO SIDA chan oe Gee ea PEOR Ee pet od 216 N To Open And Close The Hood 209 O Lane Change Assist 216 M LIS 2 24 0124343959 28524 eee ee eae 211 0 High Low Beam Switch El ie lt Wilde is ashame te ware AE RAS 211 ELEISSBETOSEOSS de 3 ERR Ed AAR 54 DOER E H Automatic Headlights If Equipped 212 O Front Map Reading Lights 217 3 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Amten LAENG osssen deck ees DE San ord EI 218 aa OE ea et e ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 220
361. out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions e The transmission will automatically upshift when nec essary to prevent engine over speed e If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over speed that shift will not occur 408 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged e Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged e If the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off e If the system detects a problem it will disable AutoStick mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected To disengage AutoStick mode return the shift lever to the DRIVE position You can shift in or out of the AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 WARNING
362. ow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the vr button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Se button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say one of the following Setup Confirmation Prompts On Setup Confirmation Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precau
363. part of your air bag inflate for your protection in a collision The system The air bag may inflate accidentally or N Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal I may not function properly if modifications are circuits and interconnecting wiring associated made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer with air bag system electrical components While the air for any air bag system service If your seat includ bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during manufacturer approved seat accessories may be the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system first cycled to the ON RUN position for persons with disabilities contact your autho rized dealer The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to
364. per level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down and radio volume up Operation Instructions Universal Serial Bus USB The USB audio input which allows the user to plug in a flash drive and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speak ers Pressing the PLAYER button will change the mode to USB an iPod or external USB drive is connected Pressing the ENTER BROWSE button while in USB mode will bring up a list of available categories within the USB The categories will consist of Playlists Artist Album All Songs and Genre Browsing through the categories will function the same as iPod browse USB will not have folder browsing If the USB connected does not have any audio files and the user selects USB as the device to play audio the screen will display No audio files on device this messaged is to be displayed for all devices that do not have audio files when connected and selected Security If this radio is installed in a vehicle that does not have a matching Vehicle Identification Number VIN an Secu rity code will need to be entered by the dealer CD PLAYER IF EQUIPPED The single disc CD player is located in the center console NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position before the CD player will operate e The CD Player is part of the radio for the
365. pful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Com mand VR button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command EVR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command VR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio
366. pinch protection when the window Manual Up is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the Lift the switch for more than a half a second and release window before closing when you want the window to stop 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Reset Auto Up Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the DOWN position To enable the window controls press and release the window lockout button again setting it in the UP position Window Lockout Switch NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a n
367. pped With Keyless Enter N Go Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON RUN position NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry Pressing the TRUNK button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle or insert a valid Key NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Fob into the ignition switch if the Start Stop button is removed and rotate it to the ON RUN position The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has oc curred the Vehicle Security Alarm will ar
368. pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 439 loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera Radial Ply Tires tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading WARNING and cold tire inflation pressures WARNINCG Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision AI ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a 5 serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your 75 mph 120 km h authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and whee
369. r the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote otart request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go or insert the key and turn it to the RUN position vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N GOTM NOTE The message Remote Start Active Push Start Button vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go or Remote Start Active Key to Run vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go will display in the EVIC until you push the START button or turn the key to the RUN position 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door rotate the door lock knob on each door trim panel forward To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock button until
370. r certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361 CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the Automatic Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect 8 4 system display if equipped When the Uconnect 8 4 system is in different modes Radio Player Settings More etc the driver and pas senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display Manual Heating And Air Conditioning If Equipped The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs OST N uA a UN oo igi Manual Temperature Control 1 Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O OFF position There are seven blower speeds i i 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR
371. r or taining Your Vehicle for further information moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that WARNING has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine from the air resulting in a lower boiling point Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Continued failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued 544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision CAUTION Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
372. r pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on volume will be reduced NOTE e Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio volume is reduced e f the hazard flashe
373. radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued N WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 485 WARNING Continued Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage a Reine anders e eie e The The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack could be crushed Never put any part of your body a que under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get 1 Open the trunk under a raised vehicle take it to a service center 2 Lift the access cover us
374. rake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key or Key Fob from vehicle cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses a Key or Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter an RF receiver and either an Ignition Node Module IGNM or a Keyless Ignition Node KIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle After cycling the ignition to the ON RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in
375. rake pedal released after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some thing Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued 392 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFE and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle Continued access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or ne
376. rake master cylinder as needed e Check function of all interior and exterior lights Required Maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for required maintenance N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 565 At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System e Change engine oil and filter e Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on e Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required e Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums hoses and park brake e Inspect engi protection and hoses e Inspect exhaust system e Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off road conditions M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 566 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Maintenance Chart Mileage Or Time Passed 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 70 000 80 000 90 000 100 000 110 000 120 000 130 000 140 000 150 000 Whichever Comes First ae W NN NE RN M WM 12 13 14 15 32 000 48 000 64 000 80 000 m cs _ _ ET 176 000 192 000 208 000 224 000 240 000 Additional Inspections Inspect CV joint boots b LX tx fx ff x j Jj X Inspect front suspension tie X X X X X X X rod ends and replace as nec essary Additional Maintenance Replace the cabin air condi X X X X X X X ti
377. rd you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the flash to pass is held for 20 seconds the feature will deactivate Front Map Reading Lights Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light can be turned on by pressing the lens To turn the lights off press the lens a second time Front Map Reading Lights The lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See Interior Lights Dimmer Controls The interior lights come on when a door is opened The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch 031463856 Dimmer Controls UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the left Ambient Light
378. re normal and will not damage the transmission e Very aggressive driving may result in some clutch odor similar to a manual transmission An active warning message will display in the Instrument Clus ter if cool down actions are needed e When stopped on an incline always hold the vehicle in place using the brakes On steep inclines Hill Start Assist HSA will temporarily hold the car in position when the brake pedal is released If the accelerator pedal is not applied after a short time the car will roll back Either reapply the brake to hold the vehicle or press the accelerator to climb the hill e Before and after the engine is started you may hear a hydraulic pump for a short period of time This noise is normal and will not damage the transmission When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds use the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup During extremely cold temperatures the transmission will not operate if the oil temperature is 22 F 30 C or below Allow the engine to idle briefly with the transmis sion in PARK in order to warm the fluid Normal operation will resume once t
379. re pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 438 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal
380. re reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Electric Power Steering Malfunction This telltale is on when the Electric Power e Steering is not operating and needs service EVIC White Telltales e Electronic Speed Control ON This telltale will illuminate amber when the O electronic speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Con trol in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 EVIC Green Telltales e Electronic Speed Control SET Y This telltale will illuminate green when the electronic speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Con trol in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Full Speedometer Analog Or Digital Display Selection PE LOC SPEED a C Full Speedometer Analog Icon Full Speedometer Digital Icon 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Analog or Digital display icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to change the display between analog and digital Vehicle Speed MPH Km h a r3 Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Speed icon is high VII lighted in the EVIC Press the RIGHT arrow button to view a digital display of
381. recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the Se button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To ignore the call touch the Ignore soft key on the touch screen You can also touch the answer soft key or touch the blue caller ID box NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the phone amp e button answer soft key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the vr button and say Dial or
382. ren to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window Your vehicle has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC or Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB and when deployment occurs the SABIC and SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbe
383. ress Send or Cancel 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Send Messages Using Voice Commands After the system confirms that you want to send your h ith ill l e Press the Se button message to John Smith your message will be sent tt FM 95 5 9 20 e After the Listening prompt and the following beep M E say Send message to John Smith mobile 1 Yes e After the system prompts you for what message you 2 No want to send say the message you wish to send or say 3 Okay List There are 18 preset messages 4 can t talk right now While the list of defined messages are being read you can E m interrupt the system by pressing the VR button and Tre saying the message you want to send A 22 an OE zl Mm liadio l layer Controls Climate More 030564875 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE List of Preset Messages 1 Yes 2 No 3 Okay 4 I can t talk right now 5 Call me 6 TI call you later 7 l m on my way 8 Thanks 9 TII be late 10 I will be number minutes late 11 See you in number minutes 12 Stuck in traffic Io 14 15 16 17 18 Start without me Where are you Are you there yet I need directions I m lost See you later Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone OFF ON Your
384. restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional informa tion on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode The chart below defines the seating positions with an Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 Mutat Does AE deler if NENNEN CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the FirstRow N A N A AIR seat where you are placin
385. river Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 12 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows e Panel Mode gt gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode gt e Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets e Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix Mode tipe Air comes from the floor defrost and side window vel demist outlets
386. rn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions To maximize fuel economy the Dual Dry Clutch auto matic transmission uses a geartrain arrangement similar to a manual transmission Therefore you should become familiar with some of the normal operational character istics of the DDCT e During low speed driving conditions in first gear vehicle momentum changes may feel exaggerated in response to changes in accelerator pedal position This behavior is normal and is similar to vehicles equipped with a manual transmission ee STARTING AND OPERATING 395 e At low speeds you may hear mechanical noises similar to a manual transmission as the transmission changes gears These noises a
387. rogrammed ON OFF refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time e If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s door handle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked Grabbing The Driver s Door Handle NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors Ist Press refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the fro
388. rol Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler tempera tures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363 NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 4 Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature and select only Panel Bi Level or Floor modes 5 Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this contro
389. rom the shift lever ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or housing and slide it up to the top of the shift lever even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Turn the engine OFF Shift Lever PRNDL Bezel 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 512 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5 Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into the access slot at the front of the shift lever assembly and push and hold the white override release lever down 051066263 Shift Lever 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the shift lever PRNDL bezel use care to avoid pinching the wiring and the rubber storage tray liner Override Release Tab 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 513 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE NOTE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service T AUTOMATIC MANUAL Towing Condition WheelsOFF The Ground T
390. ront Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with Supplemental 022663963 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Ad 2 Supplemental Driver And vanced Front Air Bags Passenger Side Knee Air Bags NOTE The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to new Federal regulations NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle may be equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system OCS that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon occupant weight This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and
391. rough the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Recirculation When outside air contains smoke odors or CG high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging On systems with Manual Climate Controls the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control ATC ATC Hard keys are located in the center of the instru ment panel Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect 8 4 system screen Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button 9 on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature hard or soft control buttons 6 7 10 11 Once the desired temperature is displayed the
392. roundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a vehicle The following table shows the approximate hitch receiver The static grid lines will show separate distances for each zone WARNINCG CAUTION Drivers must be careful when backing up even when e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob drive path structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death NN UNDERSTANDING THE F
393. roved refrigerants or lubricants can cause service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment the system to fail requiring costly repairs Referto 4 C Air Filter Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531 The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the 2 Disengage the retaining tab that secures the filter lower right of center console Perform the following cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover procedure to replace the filter 1 Remove the passenger side console closeout located on the right side of the center console lt i i T Se 072670339 532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of CAUTION the housing Take note of the air filter position indicators The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to pnm m indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it
394. rs are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is re quested the radio is also muted Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used Uconnect Phone Uconnect 200 Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for sup ported phones For Uconnect customer visit www UconnectPhone com support Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls be
395. rs are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNINCG e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Continued also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts
396. s Mid Range Treble Balance or Fade Once the desired selection is highlighted press the ENTER BROWSE button to select the item and use the TUNE SCROLL knob to adjust the setting Press the ENTER BROWSE button and BASS will dis play Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the bass tones Press the ENTER BROWSE button a second time and MID RANGE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the mid range tones Press the ENTER BROWSE button a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to de crease the treble tones Press the ENTER BROWSE button a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob clockwise or counterclockwise adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press the ENTER BROWSE button a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the BACK button to exit Bass Mid Range Treble Balance or Fade MENU Button Pressing the MENU button allows you to scroll between the setting sub menus Once the desired sub menu set ting is highlighted press the TUNE SCROLL knob to select the setting The following items are selectable Radio Mode e
397. s such as road conditions leaving the road way or striking objects or other vehicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 420 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer TSC activates automatically once the excessively swaying trailer is recognized When TSC is functioning the ESC Light will flash the engine power will be reduced and you will feel the brake being applied to individual wheels in an attempt to stop the trailer from swaying NOTE The TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode WARNING e TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Ve hicle Loading and Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Continued WARNING Continued e If TSC activates while towing a trailer stop the vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust
398. s 6 5 4 3 2 1 390 STARTING AND OPERATING Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 391 WARNING WARNING Continued e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if itis not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward with the b
399. s Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 461 CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition WARNING malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly some light smoke your engine may be out of tune Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon or malfunctioning and may require immediate monoxide poisoning service Contact your authorized dealer for service e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon assistance monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can e The use of fuel additives which are now being kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as sold as octane enhancers is not recommended a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the Most of these products contain high concentra engine running for an extended period
400. s RE HIER MES RR AAR ER 487 Jacking ISHUCHONS ode aov sce v war ec deed WEE 487 JUMP AnH base aped he OE do eric Ped 505 Keveln Reminder es scia dod oA Ho RR dore e als 17 Key Programing as mees ER on Came AR E RS 20 Key Replacement sis us 303 03 CCS SCR S Qd 20 Key sent d Domo ZG E is aco deb ee 22 og ee 19 Keyless Enter NAGO sa REG deseos GR MI RE 36 380 Keyless Entry Systet assueta EN RE n MR Eos 24 EE UTI 14 c H n 12 Knee Bolster sme premis ei459LRRE eS 60 Lane Change and Turn Signals ii sedens 216 Lane Chance ASSIST a esce sooo 9h hb ews 216 apy onoulcder BENG si opes Qua Ed aco ia d das 50 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 87 88 IF dy RAAS ES ER DEE NE N ETE 52 IPod 2 bee RE NE FONE ERG 97 Lead Free Gasoline EE EES SS SS Se 457 IgE Ead Suc suono a SERRE PUENTES dS 97 Leol TES 2s 6a bea KEY Gores oe ka oe ee 443 rS loci oc as oa teat oo eae Ow ee RA 97 556 Is 235 sug uec Ry Dn pae eod BOR 97 211 uro aa mano ou eee aah as 67 81 95 291 AE M 3 eo oe Ee ke eo eee OE ESS 291 Anti Lock ies 9e EE 294 417 Automatic Heads DIE sau oi cue ese hs IR ES 212 Brake Warning sp ER SOR dob OE heme ee as 289 Pulp Replacement aut sak RA susan sa hs Dos Daytime RUNNIN fae 5 a6 ee oe RR Hse SEE 214 Dimmer Switch Headlight 216 217 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 423 EXICHOl ope d vue d S4 EE TE don ROSA 97 POO EE N AE TERT A 9g 215 288 Hazard Warning Flasher ax escckues
401. s are OFF ACC and ON RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the ON RUN position NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Keyless Ignition Node KIN If Equipped This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and
402. s for each phone book entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit Entry e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just e
403. s or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur 506 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment behind the left headlight assembly NOTE The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post Positive Battery Post 060864281 N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 507 WARNING 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump Starting Procedure skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could r
404. se the trailer to sway Never excee E OMe re WEINE BELET D your bumper or trailer hitch NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 471 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Placard in Tire Safety Information for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle 472 STARTING AND OPERATING M Towing Requirements WARNING To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these mended guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could l
405. seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Knee Air Bags mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column and below the glove compartment Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced F
406. senger Seat Storage refer to Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for additional informa tion Make sure that objects inside the Flip n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere with the latch before closing the seat In addition after closing the Front Passenger Seat Storage bin make sure the front passenger seat cushion is pushed downward and fully latched to the base Over stuffing the storage bin may result in misclassification of the front passenger s weight The passenger seat assembly contains critical compo nents that may affect front passenger Advanced Air Bag inflation In order for the OCS to properly classify a front seat passenger the OCS components must function as designed Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover If the seat trim cover or cushion needs service for any reason take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only Chrysler Group LLC approved seat accessories may be used NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING The following requirements must be strictly followed Make sure that objects inside the Flip n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere with the latch before closing the seat In addition after closing the Front Passenger Seat Storage bin make sure the front passenger seat cushion is pushed downward and fully latched to the base Over stuffing the storage bin or a not fu
407. sit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive sixth gear The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con ditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem perature e the engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera ture e vehicle speed is sufficiently high and e the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages NOTE Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited at very cold temperatures Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal The torque converter clutch will function normally once the trans
408. sition 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position Keyless Enter N Go Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The Keyless Enter N Go feature operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
409. smitter UNLOCK button When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M grasped With Passive Entry if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter e Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote S
410. so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph 1 km h to 3 km h to objects moving a maxi mum of approximately 10 mph 16 km h such as in parking lot situations 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Ina parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check fo
411. ss and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction is detected the sunroof will automatically re tract Remove the obstruction if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re sult in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped is in certain open or partially open positio
412. ssibly loose or improperly installed A gASCAP message will be dis played in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer RESET button to turn off the message If the problem N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521 persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you
413. stem dioe sc ees 2 O Standard Blade Ignition Key If Equipped 15 TO Ari THE SYStCM 65 02 teed bee RR zi OKey Pob It Equipped eee i o To Disarm The System uk PER ERG RR 22 D Ignition Or Accessory On Message 17 E bunmiated ENY ss ses 39 ada a N RE 23 M eny A EE ET EE EE i 19 Bl Remote Keyless Entry RKE 00 000 24 O Replacement Keys s au sche ake ena YR s 20 O To Unlock The Doors 25 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Ello bock Ihe Doors x 2 9 29x wkTROESPPXENSS 26 E To Unlatch Ihe TUNK scu po ae SLAE pm ee YE 26 O Using Ihe Pam Alarm uae s mem 26 O Programming Additional Transmitters 27 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 27 H General Ihformallol susse REDES RE eikai 28 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 28 Flow do Use Remote DUE gas 2 ese nent ea es 27 Mi look RED 92 o Manual Door Locks a mc onm 92 O Power Door Locks 22 23 434 449 END EE 33 O Child Protection Door Lock System Rear ID c r 35 Bl Keyless Enter N GOTM 004 36 W Windows MT 41 O Power Windows sos ene KEN ER nese das 41 H ind D lteline sre vati ques qe d oe rbd eed 45 W Trunk Lock And Release ee 45 B Trunk Safety Warning 0 46 O Trunk Emergency Release 46 ll Occupant Restraints 000 47 HI ap shoulder Dells 04255 eu v waa RR xd 50 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
414. stem Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage Drain flush and refill as soon as possible to avoid damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pres sure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by
415. straint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle The two outboard seating positions have lower anchor ages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You can also use the inboard mounting loops from the each outboard LATCH system loops to install a child seat when the child seat is equipped with flexible straps You should never install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using System the vehicle s seat belts We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint N
416. strument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 7 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth 552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belt Maintenance Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Do not bleach dye or clean the seat belts with chemical Fuse Fuse solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric 10 Amp PAM Rear Camera Sun damage can also weaken the fabric Red LBSS RBSS Com pass 15 Amp IPC Blue If the seat belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the seat belts from the car to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if
417. sub menus Fuel Economy Trip A Trip B Stored Messages Screen Set Up DOWN Arrow Button Press and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu and sub menus Fuel Economy Trip A Trip B Stored Messages Screen Set Up RIGHT Arrow Button 7 Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to zu access the information screens or sub menu screens of a main menu item Press and hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to reset displayed selected features that can be reset LEFT Arrow Button Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the e main menu from an info screen or sub menu i item Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the cluster and consists of the follow sections a I Remember _ yed mi 35 dna 10 20 3330 4 Instant mpg Hold Plo reset SESE ae XR M 1 Speedometer Digital or Analog km h or mph L p ame NN 2 Main Screen The inner ring of the display will illuminate in grey under normal conditions yellow for non critical warnings red for critical warnings and white for on demand information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 3 Selectable Information Compass Temp Range to Empty Trip A Trip B Average MPG 4 Menu Titles Odometer Menu Set Selectable Icons Shift Lever Status PRNDL 5 6 7 Reconfigurable Telltales 8 Audio Phone Information
418. system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 3 Slide the latch plate upward
419. system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373 e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect 8 4 System Settings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recircula
420. t If Equipped Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause This light indicates that the transmission fluid damage to the engine control system It also could F temperature is running hot This may occur affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is with severe usage such as trailer towing If this flashing severe catalytic converter damage and light turns on while driving safely pull over power loss will soon occur Immediate service is and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into required NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the ru light turns off WARNING CAUTION A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 28 Selectable EVIC Information This area of the cluster w
421. t upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and Inflate Tire to XX message will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message will be displayed for a minimum of 5 seconds 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for a minimum of 5 seconds 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and 5 reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 454 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx Id Premium System If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver mo
422. t that has been overheated could cause serious a 21016 950 1600 burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat EE F tune audio Sy PT OFF JL Player Controls Climate Moare 030564872 Controls Soft Key 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Touch the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level heating Touch the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Touch the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF gf t FM 95 5 Controls Driver t tt Heated Seal Heated Weed Screen Or Nav Phone TE OFF Controls Playor More 030564880 Climate Heated Seats Soft Keys NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HI level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HI level If the HI level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati cally after a maximum of 45 minutes Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start R
423. t when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e ParkView Backup Camera Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera soft key NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses
424. tach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchor age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child
425. tart soft key the following settings will be available e Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto On Driver Heated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Off De
426. ted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the following three trip features in the next screen e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the UP buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following information Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the ON or START position N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 Resetting A Trip Info Function To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions select the function you want to reset using the UP button Push the RIGHT arrow button until the feature displays zero Range To Empty RTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level RTE cannot be reset NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the RTE display value When the RTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the RTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue un
427. tes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 5 To exit press the TIME button or press the BACK button to return to the previous menu The clock can also be set by pressing the MENU button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the MENU button until CLOCK appears in the display Using the ENTER BROWSE button select SET TIME and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 NOTE Time format has the options of 12HR or 24HR Selecting one of these options will change the way the clock is displayed INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting The Bass Mid Range Treble Balance Or Fade To set the Bass Mid Range Treble Balance or Fade settings press the AUDIO button to access the Audio sub menu The Audio sub menu can also be reached by pressing the MENU button until AUDIO appears in the display Press the ENTER BROWSE button to select the AUDIO menu and use the TUNE SCROLL knob to highlight select Bas
428. the trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway e Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop ona hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver s foot is removed from the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle can roll after brake pressure is released The system will release brake pres sure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel ee STARTING AND OPERATING 421 Hill Start Assist Disable Procedure NOTE Vehicle roll back mitigation will not be present with this feature disabled Hill Start assist can be disabled if desired This procedure applies to vehicles equipped with a manual or Powertech transmission 1 Wheels must be pointed straight ahead on a level surface Automatic transmission should be in PARK Place manual transmission in NEUTRAL if equipped Engage park brake 2 3 4 Begin with the ignition OFF 5 6 Start engine and wait for ESC OFF lamp to turn off 7 Apply brake pedal 8 Turn steering wheel 200 degrees counter clockwise just over half a turn from center position Press the ESC off
429. the UP and DOWN buttons to select the information you would like to display in that location i e Date Time Outside Temp etc and press the RIGHT arrow button to save the display setting You can press the LEFT arrow button at any time to back out of a sub menu selection 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Upper Left NOTE The Screen Setup items are only available at speeds less than 5 mph 8 km h All other menu items are not active when in Screen Setup If the vehicle is shifted into gear this feature is locked out and the main screen will display Screen Setup Unavailable While In Motion Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Speedometer e Analog 1 e Analog 2 e Digital 1 default setting e Digital 2 Gear Display e Standard PRND default setting e Single Character D e Word Drive None Compass Outside Temp default setting Time Range To Empty RTE Average MPG Current MPG Trip A Trip B Upper Right None Compass default setting NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 e Outside Temp Lower Right e Time e None default setting e Range To Empty RTE e Compass e Average MPG e Outside Temp e Current MPG e Time e Trip A Restore To Defaults Restores All Settings To Default 4 s dus Settings Lower Left ios e Okay e None default setting Uconnect SETTINGS The Uconnect system uses a combination of soft and Outside Temp hard keys located on the center of the instr
430. the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal p vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Replacement Keys NOTE Only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key or Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOT
431. the Phone Bluetooth soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Supplement 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SiriusXM Setup After pressing the SirtusXM Setup soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Channel Skip SiriusXMTM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SirtusXM Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SiriusXMTM ID numbers for your re ceiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SiriusXM M subscription Travel Link is a separate NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 Uconnect 200 AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SiriusXMTM RADI
432. the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick The range markings will consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding 1 qt 1L of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525 CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Also be sure the oil fill cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection 1 4L Turbo Engine For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12991 Engine Oil Selection 2 0L And 2 4L Engine For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under
433. the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Removing Slack From Belt 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt
434. the buckles do not work properly FUSES Interior Fuses Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse 20 Amp Front Heated Seats Yellow F3 F4 F5 bl Blue 10 Amp Fuel Door F20 10 Amp SCCM SAS Switch Red Bank 10 Amp HVAC Humidity Red Sensor In Car Tem perature Sensor In side Mirror Assem ERE p2 20 Amp Rear Heated Seats Yellow Heated Steering Wheel MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Underhood Fuses Fuse Fuse The Integrated Power Module is located on the right side of the engine compartment behind the battery 10 Amp Diagnostic Port Red 10 Amp UGDO EOM Red 20 Amp Sunroof Yellow Direct Battery For Underhood PDC RLY Coils 5 Amp DDCT Feed 4 Tan 5 Amp Stop Lamp Switch 10 Amp Pneumatic Lumbar Support Solenoid Pneumatic Lumbar Support Pump Motor ui 072765514 7 EM Integrated Power Module I Pe Ce 5 Amp F24 Tan EL KON ru F01 70 Amp Direct Battery Tan Feed 1 To BCM 554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description Cavity Direct Battery 10 Amp ORC Feed 2 To BCM Red Output For Starter 20 Amp ECM EPS Backup Relay 1 Yellow Lamp Switch ESP Pump Motor 15 Amp DDCT Feed 2 Blue 15 Amp DDCT Feed 3 Blue DDCT Feed 1 SDU EBL RLY Coil Blower Motor RLY Coil 15 Amp ESC Brake Pedal Blue Switch OCM 20 Amp ECM 5 Amp Tan Radiator Fan En Yellow able RLY
435. the current speed in MPH or km h Pressing the RIGHT arrow button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu i it LN NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button and Coolant Temp will be dis played Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to scroll Jf i Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Tire Pressure is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following will be displayed e f tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON e If one or more tires have low pressure Inflate Tire To XX is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other tire pressure value e If the Tire Pressure system requires service Service Tire Pressure System is displayed Spare Tire STORED MESSAGES Tire Pressure Analog Display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 Kaskade Remember SS Low Pressure CY Spare Tir
436. the red indicator is visible To unlock the rear doors rotate the door lock button until the red indicator is visible 021864388 Door Lock Knob If the door lock button is locked no red indicator visible when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim For personal security and safety in the event of an panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Lock Switch 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry system For further informat
437. the trunk If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights will turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a
438. through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave Shallow Standing Water effects Although your vehicle is capable of driving through Continued shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so ee STARTING AND OPERATING 411 CAUTION Continued WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out
439. til the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new RTE value will display Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and holding the RIGHT arrow button as prompted in the EVIC display Upon reset the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Current Miles Per Gallon MPG or Liters Per 100 Kilometers L 100km This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph form while driving This will monitor the gas mileage in real time as you drive and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Tire PSI Press and release the UP button until Tire Pressure is displayed 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Tire pressure information is displayed as follows e f tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle graphic is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner or the graphic e If one or more tires have low pressure Inflate Tire To XX and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the graphic Tire pressure values that are too low will be flashing e f the Tire Pressure System requires service Service TPM System is displayed Tire Pressure is an infor mation only function and cannot be reset Stored Messages When a stor
440. tings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary 6 Electronic Rear Window Defrost Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indica tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an addi tional 15 minutes of operation press the button a second time N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365 You e You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime CAUTION Continued by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra ime sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window e To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear win dow defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating
441. tion in Start ing and Operating for additional warnings cautions and information about the spare tire its use and operation 8 Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel Lightly tighten the wheel bolts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack 6 do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle NOTE has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may e For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a result in personal injury center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare A 060567506 Mounting Spare Tire 9 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 10 Finish tightening the wheel bolts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each wheel bolt is 95 ft lb 128 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 11 Stow the jack tools and flat tire Install the jack with the base facing the front of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener WARNING e A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
442. tion control can also be manually selected in Manual operation Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humi
443. tionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the VR button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the VR button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the VR button and say Transfer Call Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And M
444. tions select the function you want to reset using the UP or DOWN buttons Press the RIGHT arrow button until the feature displays zero NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 Stored Messages sa Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow _ button until the Messages display icon is high lighted in the EVIC This feature shows the number of stored warning messages Pressing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the Main Menu j hee il N Screen Setup Screen Setup Display Analog Icon Screen Setup Display Digital Icon Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the Screen Setup sub menu The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the Screen Setup sub menu The Screen Setup feature allows you to change the location that information is displayed within the instrument cluster Use the UP and DOWN buttons to highlight a screen setup location i e Upper Left Upper Right etc then press the RIGHT arrow button to select the location and make changes Press
445. tire with a damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise Security Chain Company SCC Super Z6 low profile occurs that could indicate device breakage Re traction device or equivalent is recommended move the damaged parts of the device before further use Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Continued Using tires of different size and type M S Snow between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision ee STARTING AND OPERATING 447 CAUTION Continued e Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the traction device manufacturer s in structions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufac turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h e Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires can be identified by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow
446. tives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check Routine fluid level checks are not required However if you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the fluid level checked Operation with an improper fluid level can greatly reduce the life of your transmission Transmission Fluid Changes Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle However if the vehicle is used for frequent trailer towing police fleet taxi etc change the fluid as indicated in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to 546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Also if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or the transmission is repaired the fluid should be changed Manual Transmission If Equipped Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle
447. today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 469 Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch system works by applying le verage through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control and thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds contributing posi tively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recom mended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with GAWR requirements Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain Industry Standards Class II Medium Dut 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Hea
448. ton gt VR on the steering wheel Cancels Voice command Player Home listening to flow will revert the screen will shown your voice previous voice on the touch command command step screen 030770612 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 NOTE 1 Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles 2 You can replace Player with Radio Navigation Phone Climate More or Settings 3 Navigation commands only work if equipped with 3 Navigation 4 Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Uconnect Voice Command Navigation Universal Commands The commands can be spoken on any screen when nol on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command bu VR on the steering wheel Navigation Ap tel Garmin Guided Garmin Garmin will choose played asking if Nene Pee n Dialog for Map screen an alternate route you want to adii ee beds finding wil be that does not include ance repented restaurants that displayed i d are near to your current location umeni Nus Current Navigation Route Navigation Route will not be ade et will be canceled 030563042 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 NOTE 1 You can also say Find City Find Favorite Find Play by Category Find Play by Name Find Recently Found Where to or Go Home 2 You can say Find Nearest then Restaura
449. ton 2 to reduce the air T pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497 TIREFIT Usage Precautions e Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed on the bottle label to assure optimum operation of the sys tem Refer to Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 are a one tire application use After each use always replace these components immediately at an authorized dealer When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded 498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M e For optimum performance make sure the valve stem WARNING on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit e Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the TIREFIT kit e You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment on the bottom of the air pump for inflating sport balls rafts or similar inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the following circumstanc
450. touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 e Flash Headlight With Lock When this feature is selected the front and headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE tran
451. transmis sion shitt the transmission into REVERSE Abl Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact ways block or chock the trailer wheels spare tire GCWR must not be exceeded Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Total weight must be distributed between the tow and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to vehicle and the trailer such that the following four Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ratings are not exceeded ating for proper tire inflation procedures 1 GVWR Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres Continued sures before trailer usage 4 4 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General required when towing a trailer with electronically Information in Starting and Operating for the actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with proper inspection procedure a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic mM ler red When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor brake controller is not required mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher 1 000 Ibs 450 kg and required for trailers in excess of load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s 2
452. transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive press the button on the front of the shift lever and move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers This transmission is programmed to prevent shifting from REVERSE to DRIVE or DRIVE to REVERSE if vehicle speed is above 6 mph 10 km h This safety feature helps protect your transmission from damage Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and AutoStick shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further informa tion Moving the shift lever rearward or forward while in the AutoStick position beside the Drive posi tion will manually select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster a
453. trol and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE After pressing the SET button Cruise Control Set message is displayed for 5 seconds or until another switch is pressed For analog speedometer The red outer line on the speedometer changes from red to white to identify set speed For digital speedometer The MPH reading turns from white to red to identify set speed To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE After pressing the OFF button a Cruise Control off message is displayed for 5 seconds or until another switch is pressed For analog speedometer The white outer line on the speedometer returns to red For digital speedometer The MPH reading returns from red to white To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES b
454. tween the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be focused on the safe operation of the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death The steering wheel controls will contain the will enable you to access the system When you Uconnect Phone Button two control buttons Uconnect Phone Se button and Voice Command Sve button that press the Uconnect Phone amp e button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Voice Command Button When you press the Voice Command vR i VR button y
455. u there yet 4 need more direction 15 Where are we meeting 5 LOL 16 Can this wait 6 Why 17 Bye for now 7 I love you 18 When can we meet 8 Call me 19 Send number to call 9 Call me later 20 Start without me 10 Thanks NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming mes sages e Press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup SMS Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice to change it Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Last Enter Number Name on Phone is redialed Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Main Menu Recent Towing English Enter Number Francais See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Uconnect Tutorial Read Send Messages Messages 030607515 U
456. ubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary 534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Adding Washer Fluid The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield w
457. ug and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet position 504 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 3 Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 black in color and screw the fitting at the end of hose 7 onto the valve stem 4 Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 3 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar the tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 bar or higher 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn on TIREFIT and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver side door open ing NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing 2 Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet 3 Place the TIREFIT Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle 4 Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire ser vice center 5 Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the au thorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the TIREFIT servic
458. uided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound command form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 for it For example you can use the compound com mand form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conver sational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to
459. ularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may re sult in serious injury or death Driver One Touch Down The driver door power window switch has an auto down feature Press the window switch to the second detent and release and the window will go down automatically To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going alll the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Front Windows Express Up And Down If NOTE Equipped e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Express Down Press the switch for less than a half a second and release The window will go down automatically e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually Manual Down Press the switch for more than a half a second and release when you want the window to stop Express Up Lift the switch for less than a half a second and release WARNING The window will go up automatically There is no anti
460. ument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features e Compass e Time 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Hard Keys Hard Keys are located below the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings i e 30 60 90 press the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Soft Keys Soft Keys are accessible on the Uconnect display Customer Programmable Features Uconnect System 8 4 Settings Press the More soft key then press the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time When making a selection press the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been se lected Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow soft key to return to the previo
461. unctures up to 1 4 in 6 mm in the tire tread can be sealed with TIREFIT Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately 4 F 20 C This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a maximum speed of 55 mph 88 km h TIREFIT Storage The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk under the load floor 496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation 5 Mode Select Knob o AY p S 6 Sealant Hose Clear t 7 Air Pump Hose Black 8 Power Plug Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode Selecting Air Mode lal Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to this position y for air pump operation only Use the Black Air MM Pump Hose 7 when selecting this mode 060410595 1 Sealant Bottle 2 Deflation Button 3 Pressure Gauge 4 Power Button Selecting Sealant Mode Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to this position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant wy and to inflate the tire Use the Sealant Mm Hose clear hose 6 when selecting this mode Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button 4 once to turn On the TIREFIT kit Push and release the Power Button 4 again to turn Off the TIREFIT kit Using The Deflation Button Press the Deflation But
462. ure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 450 STARTING AND OPERATING ee For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressur
463. urtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 4 inches 10 16 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power until the ignition key is re moved or the ignition switch is changed to OFF using the Keyless Go Start Stop button
464. us menu or press the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available e Display Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status touch and release the Day Night or Auto soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Set Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the Set Language soft key and then touch the desired language soft key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Touch the ba
465. ust meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 582 INDEX NEE Id ABS Anti Lock Brake System 415 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 538 demo Duel 23 sue pers dare eae ewes ees 462 Adding Washer Fluid e denm n 534 Additives Fuel si aka dcn ah dod aede RYE 460 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 527 Air Conditioner Maintenance 529 AF CONCINOMING 342444466 RR ER CASS d E Sed 361 Air Conditioning Controls veectenategead ves 361 Air Conditioning Filet 444 4 4 4 lt 0 06 4 gaa e wa 374 530 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 529 530 Air Conditioning System 361 372 529 Air Pressure Tires 0000000008 437 he 22 e4 9344 0193 X 9E casey SAT I ET 60 77 Aitbae Deployment sesi in m e dor e me hee Rr 79 Pipa Lich 2339393 EER he ia Taai 67 81 95 291 Airbag Mamtenante osa dee db REG ER CES ees 80 ADAL tor AR TEL EE ER N 63 65 77 Airbag Window Side Curtain 64 65 77 Alam eet y Mat sn 56454 eons bens ase S 21 PCCM IGG ops ear eo OT eRe OIE 291 Alarm System Security Alarm 21 Alarm Panic 0 246 ao do ee ix os Bees bes 26 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 415 Anti Lock Warning Light 1 am 294 415 417
466. usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 16 Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 17 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi o mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 18 Fuel Door Reminder The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle MI wi Y 19 Electronic Speed Control Set Light This light will turn on when the electronic speed control has
467. utton and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 km h NOTE Tap results of 1 mph 1 km h depends on selection of US or Metric units using the left hand Steering Wheel Buttons and EVIC display NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The El
468. vy 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 470 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain 1 4L Turbo Engine Trailer towing is not recommended Engine Transmission Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt See Note 2 0L and 2 4L Auto 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 150 Ibs 50 kg Man Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information Trailer And Tongue Weight severely from side to side which will cause loss of con Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in trol of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the GTW in front is the cause of many trailer collisions on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the a r exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on wheels or heavier in the rear can cau
469. weather strip off of trunk carpet trim 3 Pull back carpet to access fuel release cable behind carpet 056870509 4 Pull the release cable VEHICLE LOADING As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar ee STARTING AND OPERATING 465 Vehicle Certification Label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle the driver s door This includes driver passengers and cargo The total The label contains the following information Se eeu Re UA BO ay you AS We GVWR e Name of manufacturer i Tire Size e Month and year of manufacture The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents l the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires a A Ed VAR must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size 5 e Vehicle Identification Number VIN Rim Size e Type of Vehicle This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH Inflation Pressure Ihe bar code allows a computer scanner to read the This is the cold tire inflation pressure for vour vehicle for Vehicle Identification Number VIN P y all loading conditions 466 STARTING AND OPERATING See Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the veh
470. weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 434 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg STARTING AND OPERATING 4435 Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRO
471. when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Multifunction Lever Turn Signals The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show multifunction lever is located on the left side of the proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights steering column NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on 031563089 Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Multifunction Lever NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever towa
472. will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call By Saying A Name Press the Se button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say john doe or john doe mobile where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple number
473. wing beep say Setup Phone Pairing e Press the Se button to begin e You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the Xe button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Sve button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the EVR button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training command You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows
474. y or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup e 6 Y It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Occupant Classification System OCS Front Passenger Seat The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle The Occupant Classification System OCS consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Occupant Classification Module OCM located in the front passenger seat e OCS Sensor located in the front passenger seat e Air Bag Warning Light A The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag The OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the sensors estimate that e The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light objects in it or e The front passenger seat is occupi
475. y depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 580 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se ut nsns WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C Uus iq In ee representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires m
476. y from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department immedi ately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 578 e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the
477. y to return to the previous menu Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync Time With GPS When in this display you may automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Set Time Hours When in this display you may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 hours up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Time Format When in this display you may select the time format display setting Touch the Time Format soft key until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Show Time In Status Bar When in this display
478. yless Entry RKE Transporting Pets Tread Wear Indicators Tap Odometer 2 322349 en 5G Sandee Geheds 292 Trunk Lid Deck Lad iani 45 46 Trunk Release Remote Control 45 Trunk Release Emergency ue dese dre dees 46 TSS vsu dos oe a Pus to ed dia ad 216 286 UCI COMECON awisWaeAdesey34 93433 HE Di 352 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 117 U itorm Tire Quality Grades ve e 4 vq reet ERES 579 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 352 Universal Transmitter llis 249 Unleaded Gasoline 0 00 00 0G 457 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 55 Vany iile Pr a mee ox 109 Vehicle Certification Label 465 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle LOAD soe ew t SEE 433 464 466 Vehicle Modifications Alterations di 600 INDEX NEE Id Velde LONG Ce sis EERDER S ERR ED 374 556 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 21 Voice Recognition System VR 180 Warning Flasher Hazard va wo oh beg es 483 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 284 Warmings and Cautions sessp sas ERES spiss 6 Warranty Information a euo vanos dae cous eed vet 576 Washer du CCS Fluid ap eee dove 8m AARDE WE 534 Washers Windshield eee 222 Washing VERNICE sai vos e oce t erede 047 Water Divine TWOUS sy ear got DERE RP Pa 409 Wheel and Wheel Trim sess 549 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
479. ystem Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter After the last door is closed or if all doors are closed the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds During that time the Vehicle Security Light will flash If it does not illuminate the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming In addition if you open a door during the arming period the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming pro cess If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after closing the door you must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go Press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button until the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC indi cates that the vehicle ignition is OFF refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information Then either press the power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter LOCK but ton or press the Passive Entry Door Handle LOCK button refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information To Disarm The System Vehicles Not Equi

2013 Dodge Dart Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents